NetVault Administrator s Guide

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "NetVault Administrator s Guide"

Transcription

1 NetVault Administrator s Guide Version 6.03 Release Date 01/15/2001

2 Copyrights Software Copyright 2001 BakBone Software NetVault Administrator s Guide Copyright 2001 BakBone Software Printed and online versions. This software product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The distribution and sale of this product are intended for the use of the original purchaser only per the terms of the License Agreement. All other product trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The NetVault Administrator s Guide documentation is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, reduced or transferred to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from BakBone Software. THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN; THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED INTO NEW EDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION. BAKBONE SOFTWARE MAY MAKE IMPORVEMENTS AND/OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S) AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED IN THIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME. BakBone Software Pacific Heights Blvd. Suite 900 San Diego, California

3 CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION... 1 Introducing NetVault...3 NetVault Features... 3 NetVault Application Plugin Modules... 4 About This Guide...4 Using Help... 5 About BakBone Software... 6 Technical Support... 6 BakBone Software Web Site: 6 Helpdesk Support Lines... 6 CHAPTER 2 MANAGING NETVAULT SOFTWARE... 7 Installing NetVault Software... 9 Types of Installation... 9 General Installation Requirements... 9 Windows NT Installation AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) FreeBSD HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/ IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI) LINUX (Intel x86) Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS SCO Open Server Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) UnixWare UnixWare

4 ii Contents Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements...24 Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s Installing a Plugin or APM...25 Removing a Plugin or APM...26 Licenses for NetVault Products Locating Machine IDs...27 Requesting your License Key...28 Installing a License Key...28 Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault Upgrading from NetVault to a Later Version...30 Upgrading from NetVault to a Later Version...30 Using the NetVault Configurator Starting the Configurator...32 Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box...32 Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature...37 Configuring NetVault 6.x Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel...38 Setting up the kernel...38 Uninstalling NetVault Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines...39 Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines...40 Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations...40 CHAPTER 3 NETVAULT BASICS Graphical User Interface Menu Bar...43 Command Toolbar...45 Status Line...46 Managing Devices and Clients Device Management Window...47 Client Management Window...48 Domain Management Window...48 Managing Media Media Management Window...50 Status Window...50 Backing Up Data Backup Window...52 Restoring Backed Up Data Restore Window...53 Job Operations Jobs Window...54 Logs Window...55

5 NetVault Administrator s Guide iii Using Templates...56 Policy Management Window Searching for Data...57 Selecting Items...58 CHAPTER 4 DEVICE AND LIBRARY MANAGEMENT What are NetVault Devices?...61 Device Types Device Connections Planning a Shared Device Installation Devices in a Windows NT Environment Shared Devices Setting up a Device Working with the Device Management Window...64 Menu Bar Window Tabs Icons and Drive Lights The Devices Tab The Device Logs Tab The Media Requests Tab Adding NetVault Devices...77 Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client Adding Libraries Adding a Shared Library Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients Adding Devices in Windows Working with Firewalls Creating Virtual Libraries Scanning Drives and Media...94 Scanning for Shared Drives Scanning Media Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots...97 Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots Setting the Life of Cleaning Media Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval Manually Cleaning Media CHAPTER 5 CLIENT MANAGEMENT Client Management The Client Management Window...105

6 iv Contents Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box Using the Clients List Box Using Find NetVault Machine Adding a NetVault Client CHAPTER 6 DOMAIN MANAGEMENT Domain Management The NetVault Domain Management Window Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box Using the Controlled Servers List Box Using Find NetVault Machine CHAPTER 7 MEDIA MANAGEMENT Media Management The Media Management Window Using the Media List Box Status Information in Details Area Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu Backup Saveset Information in Details Area CHAPTER 8 NETVAULT SERVER STATUS The NetVault Server Status Window Using the Device Status Area Using the Client Status Area Using the Job Status Area Using Operator Status Area CHAPTER 9 DISASTER RECOVERY Disaster Recovery The NetVault Database Backing Up the NetVault Database NetVault Database Recovery Restoring Basic Operating System Restoring NetVault Operation Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup Restoring the NetVault Database Importing Media Unknown to NV Database Using the Data Copy Plugin Target Audience...152

7 NetVault Administrator s Guide v Installing the Data Copy Plugin Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin Copying Data Copying a Backup Copying a Backup Set CHAPTER 10 BACKING UP DATA Backing up Your Data The NetVault Backup Window Backup Window Buttons Window Tabs Menu Commands Using the Selections Tab Using the Backup Options Tab Using the Schedule Tab Using the Target Tab Advanced Options Savesets Incremental Backup Procedure Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule Restoring Incremental Backups Doing a Simple Backup Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin How the Plugin Works Consolidating Backups Using the Raw Device Plugin Installing the Raw Device Plugin Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX CHAPTER 11 RESTORING DATA Restoring Data The NetVault Restore Window Restore Window Buttons Window Tabs Menu Commands Using the Selections Tab Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection Using the Restore Search Facility Using Restore Filter Options

8 vi Contents Using the Restore Options Tab Using the Target Client Tab Using the Schedule Tab Using the Advanced Options Tab Savesets Restoring Incremental Backups Doing a Simple Restore CHAPTER 12 SCHEDULING BACKUP &RESTORE JOBS Scheduling Jobs Schedule Options Using Schedule - Immediate Using Schedule - Once Using Schedule - Repeating Using Schedule - Triggered CHAPTER 13 JOB MANAGEMENT Managing Jobs Job Management Tabs Using The Status Tab Using the Jobs Tab Using the History Tab CHAPTER 14 USING LOGS Using Logs The Logs Window Logs Window Buttons Using the Logs Window Viewing Extended Logs More Info - Job Messages More Info - Warnings More Info - Errors Filtering Logs Using the Filter Options Dialog Box CHAPTER 15 USING POLICY (SET) TEMPLATES What are Policy (Set) Templates? Types of Policy Sets Backup and Restore Job Sets...265

9 NetVault Administrator s Guide vii Backup Job Sets Restore Job Sets Standard Policy (Set) Operations Saving a Set using the Save As button Loading a Set using the Load button Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) Guidelines for using Schedule Sets Using Policy Management CHAPTER 16 USING ADVANCED FEATURES What are Advanced Features? Using the Advanced Options Tab Backup Life (Backup only) Compression (Backup and Restore) Verify after Backup (Backup only) Duplication (Backup only) Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore) NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic Working with Firewalls APPENDIX A PERFORMANCE TUNING What is Performance Tuning? Optimizing Drive Performance Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box From a Selected Drive From the Device Management Window From the Library Configure Tab Using the Edit Drive Window Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size Gathering Statistics Viewing the Statistics Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled APPENDIX B TROUBLESHOOTING Getting Help Dumping Log Files Producing Trace Files Running the NetVault Configurator NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT

10 viii Contents NetVault for UNIX Help with Common Problems Waiting for Media Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration Tips on Backing Up Sybase Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape Informix Configurations Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems Overheads in writing to tape Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? APPENDIX C USING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS What is a Regular Expression? Where are Regular Expressions Used? Using Regular Expressions APPENDIX D HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT Platform and Operating System Support Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver Installation from Image File Copying the Software from the CD-ROM Installing the Software from Image Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver Post-Installation Specifying Media Changer to RS NetVault Utilities APPENDIX E CREATING VIRTUAL LIBRARIES Creating Virtual Libraries Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library Generating Disk Devices APPENDIX F USING THE NETVAULT CONFIGURATOR Using the NetVault Configurator Machine Tab License Tab...338

11 NetVault Administrator s Guide ix Service Tab Packages Tab General Tab Plugin Options Tab Fire Wall Tab GUI Tab Logging Daemon Tab Media Manager Tab Network Manager Tab Schedule Manager Tab Security Tab APPENDIX G USING THE REPORTING TOOL Using the Reporting Tool Running nvreport from the Command Line Report Arguments Simple Report Example Using Filters Example Sorting Output Creating Custom Templates Making New Templates Using the Server Argument Fields Available for Reports Report: jobdefinitions (jd) Report: jobhistory (jh) Report: advancedoptions (ao) Report: schedules (sc) Report: backuptargets (bt) Report: selections (se) Constants and Syntax INDEX

12

13 CHAPTER 1 Introduction Introducing NetVault - 3 NetVault Features - 3 NetVault Application Plugin Modules - 4 About This Guide - 4 UsingHelp-5 About BakBone Software - 6 Technical Support - 6

14

15 NetVault Administrator s Guide 3 Introducing NetVault Information is a priceless asset to organizations. As storage environments grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to backup corporate data while keeping the applications your users need up and running. NetVault from BakBone Software is a scalable solution for departments, data centers and enterprises available on UNIX and Windows NT operating systems. NetVault is built on a modular software architecture created for expansion, growth and continued enhancement of a growing variety of applications. NetVault also supports various storage network designs, including Storage Area Networks (SAN) and Network Attached Storage (NAS). Providing enterprise-wide control in distributed and centralized environments, NetVault is able to operate in multi-vendor networks and supports a broad range of servers, clients, database applications, storage media and high performance devices. NetVault Features The NetVault storage management features are many and varied and include: n Use of native NetVault API for application integration. n Easy-to-use administration graphical user interface (GUI) for both UNIX and Windows. n Point and click installation of Application Plugin Modules (APM ) to NetVault servers or clients across networks. n Define pre and post processing scripts. n Support for raw devices and file systems. n Extensive low level error checking, logging and reporting. n Tunable shared transfer memory and block size for optimized performance. n Local or remote backup and recovery. n SAN-enabled and LAN-free backup. n Dynamically Shared Devices across SANs or shared SCSI. n Library Sharing among servers and clients. n Duplication for off-site disaster recovery. n Disk staging for increased performance across networks. n Supports as many data streams as there are devices. n Standard, non-proprietary tape formats, CPIO for UNIX and MTF for Windows.

16 4 Chapter 1 Introduction NetVault Application Plugin Modules NetVault offers Application Plugin Modules (APM ) which, when combined with the NetVault software, provide application specific interfaces for a wide variety of database managers, including: n Microsoft Exchange n Microsoft SQL n DB2 n Sybase n Informix n Oracle Online n Oracle RMAN n SAP R/3 Backint Each of the APM s is explained in detail in the NetVault Application Plugin Module User s Guide. About This Guide In the Administrator s Guide you will find basic NetVault operations for managing your devices and data. NOTE: This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of your computer and its operating conventions, including how to use a mouse and standard menus and commands. It also assumes you know how to open, save, and close files. For help with any of these techniques, please see your Operating System documentation. The Administrator s Guide is divided into four sections: n Section One: The first section introduces you to NetVault, its features and BakBone Software. It explains how to install and manage the NetVault software. Section one also includes information on the user interface, basic operations and how to search for and select data items. n Section Two: The second section contains a series of chapters devoted to managing your devices, libraries, clients and domains. n Section Three: In section three you will learn how to manage the media you use to store your data. You will also discover how to back up your data and restore that data when necessary. In addition, there are instructions on how to schedule and manage the jobs you run, and how to use the job logs.

17 NetVault Administrator s Guide 5 n Section Four: Section four contains information on using Policy Sets to record and reuse job options. In this section you will also learn about the advanced options used to further define the way you work with your data. Using Help NetVault provides a fully interactive online help system. By pressing the F1 key, you can open the help files at any time, as shown in the following figure: From the Help Contents window you can: n Learn How to use Help n Learn how to Get Started n Access the Help Index n Access the Glossary n Display Procedures n Display Functional Descriptions n Click on a specific icon to learn about a management function or job operation

18 6 Chapter 1 Introduction n Open the help topics for menu commands n Learn more about plugins from the NetVault Plugin Index About BakBone Software Headquartered in San Diego, California, BakBone Software is a storage-management software company with offices worldwide. BakBone Software is committed to developing and providing high-performance backup and recovery, archival, near-line and off-line storage solutions that address the problems of modern data storage management. Technical Support BakBone Software is dedicated to providing friendly, expert advice to NetVault product customers. Our highly trained professionals are available to answer your questions, offer solutions to your problems and generally help you make the most of your NetVault purchase. Log on to our web site, or contact our Helpdesk, for more information. BakBone Software Web Site: Helpdesk Support Lines Area Contact North America BONE ( ) [email protected] Europe [email protected] Asia Pacific Rim [email protected]

19 CHAPTER 2 Managing NetVault Software Installing NetVault Software - 9 n Types of Installation - 9 n General Installation Requirements - 9 n Windows NT Installation - 10 n AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) - 16 n Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) - 17 n FreeBSD n HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/ n IRIX6.2and6.5(SiliconGraphics,SGI)-18 n LINUX (Intel x86) - 18 n Microsoft Windows n Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client - 19 n Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) - 19 n NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS n SCOOpenServer5-20 n Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) - 20 n Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) - 21 n Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) - 21 n Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) - 22 n UnixWare n UnixWare 7-23 n Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements - 24 Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s - 25 n Installing a Plugin or APM - 25 n RemovingaPluginorAPM-26 Licenses for NetVault Products - 26 n Locating Machine IDs - 27 n Requesting your License Key - 28 n Installing a License Key - 28 Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault - 30 Using the NetVault Configurator - 31

20 8 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software n Starting the Configurator - 32 n Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box - 32 n Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature - 37 Configuring NetVault 6.x - 38 n Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel - 38 n Setting up the kernel - 38 Uninstalling NetVault - 39 n Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines - 39 n Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines - 40 n Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations - 40

21 NetVault Administrator s Guide 9 Installing NetVault Software NetVault Software is easy to install. The instructions contained here are also available in the booklet included in the software s CD-ROM case. Familiarize yourself with the following information before installing the NetVault software. Types of Installation There are three types of installations: n NetVault Server System: Provides the full range of NetVault facilities with local control using an installed Graphical User Interface (GUI), or remotely over the network with proper security authorization. This type of installation canalsoactasaclient. n NetVault Client System: Provides a subset of NetVault facilities, without the local device support, controlled remotely over the network with proper security authorization. n Custom NetVault System: Provides the facility to install specific NetVault modules. General Installation Requirements Before installing NetVault Software, the following requirements must be in place: n Sufficient disk space to install and use the software. The amount of disk space required depends on the operating system, installation method and likely usage of the NetVault system. For example, in a NetVault Enterprise System backing up a large number of NetVault clients, the NetVault Database directory could be fairly large and require more disk space. If you need assistance determining the amount of space required, contact BakBone Technical Support (page 6). n ATCP/IPnetwork.A TCP/IP network is required unless you intend to use the NetVault Software in a standalone configuration. This type of network is not necessary if the NetVault Server is backing itself up to a local device. n NetVault Graphic Requirements. Minimum graphic display resolution (under Microsoft Windows NT or UNIX X-Windows) of 800 x 600 pixels displaying 256 colors. NOTE: Refer to Appendix D, Hardware and Software Support (page 321) to determine whether the operating system, platform, and tape device you are using is supported. You can also find this information on the NetVault Technical Support web site at

22 10 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Windows NT Installation The requirements for installing NetVault on a Windows NT system are as follows: n A computer running Microsoft Windows NT, version 4.0 with at least 32 Mbytes RAM. At this time only the Intel processor (or compatible) is supported. You must also have SP3 (NT 4.0) or later installed. n Approximately 10 Mbytes of available disk space; more if you intend to use this machine to control a large NetVault domain (a server and many clients) or large multi-drive tape libraries. n For NetVault Server and Custom installations (with the GUI), it is necessary to pre-install Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 3.02 or later, in order to use the HTML-based help system (NT version 4.0 or later) included with the NetVault Software. n A TCP/IP network if you are not using the software in a standalone configuration. Installation Procedure To install the NetVault Software on a Windows NT workstation or server, follow these steps: 1. Log on as the Administrator or as a user with Administrator privileges. 2. Close all programs. 3. Insert Disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive. 4. Run SETUP.EXE. NOTE: The CD-ROM distribution is split into disk folders, which may be copied to make a set of installation floppy disks. By running SETUP.EXE in the first disk folder, all the software in the other disk folders will automatically be installed, without re-selection. An InstallShield Wizard opens and begins the installation setup.

23 NetVault Administrator s Guide Once the InstallShield Wizard has loaded, the NetVault Setup Welcome dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure: 6. Click Next to open the License Agreement window:

24 12 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software 7. Click Next to open the User Information dialog box: 8. Enter your Name and Company and click Next to open the Choose Destination Location dialog box:

25 NetVault Administrator s Guide If the Destination Folder is where you want the software to be installed, click Next to proceed to the Enter Database dialog box: 10. Click Next to open the Setup Type dialog box. If you want to change the destination for the installation, click the Browse button; navigate to and select the desired location, then click Next to proceed. The Setup Type dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure: 11. Select the desired Setup Type for the type of installation you are doing: n Custom NetVault System n NetVaultClientSystem n NetVault Server System

26 14 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software 12. Click Next to open the Enter Machine Name dialog box: 13. Enter the desired NetVault Machine Name. This name does not have to be the same as your computer machine name, but it is recommended that the NetVault machine name be the same as the computer name. NOTE: Machine names are alpha/numeric strings of any length with the exception of capital letters, spaces and punctuation (especially hyphens). Do not use these characters in your machine names. 14. Click Next to open the NetVault Password dialog box:

27 NetVault Administrator s Guide Enter the NetVault Password information. NOTE: The NetVault Security Password allows access to your machine from NetVault. This information should be secured so that only the NetVault Domain Administrators for your system have access to it. You can change the password and disable security using the NetVault Configurator. See Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31) for more information. 16. Click Next. The InstallShield progress meter appears, as shown in the following figure:

28 16 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box opens: 17. Select the desired option by clicking the appropriate option button: n Yes, I want to restart my computer now. n No, I will restart my computer later. 18. Click Finish. NOTE: It is recommended that you restart your computer. Some NetVault files require updating with a reboot in order to function properly. AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) Mounting the CD-ROM: If the CD-ROM is not already mounted, mount it using the SMIT utility Use the SMIT utility to install the CD-ROM file: /aix/image Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the commands: cd <cdrom>/aix (where <cdrom> is the device node for your CD-ROM)./install nvdist

29 NetVault Administrator s Guide 17 Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -r -t cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd /CDROM/TRU64./INSTALL NVDIST NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission. FreeBSD 3.2 Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -rt cd9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd/cdrom/cdrom0/freebsd./install nvdist NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800 Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point / cdrom already exists): su root

30 18 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd /HP./INSTALL NVDIST NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI) Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -t iso9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the commands: cd /cdrom/irix./install nvdist LINUX (Intel x86) Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /mnt/cdrom already exists): su root mount /mnt/cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the commands: cd /cdrom/linux./install nvdist Microsoft Windows 2000 Installing the NetVault Software:

31 NetVault Administrator s Guide Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges. 2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive. 3. Run setup.exe located as follows: <cd drive>\w2k\disk1\setup.exe NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on to the Windows95/98 machine. 2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive. 3. Run setup.exe located as follows: <cd drive>\win9x\disk1\setup.exe NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges. 2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVault distribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive. 3. Run setup.exe located as follows: <cd drive>\nt\disk1\setup.exe In order to use the integrated HTML-base help system, it is necessary to have Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.02 or later, installed. NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

32 20 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. SCO Open Server 5 Mounting the CD-ROM: Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -r <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd/cdrom/cdrom0/sco pkgadd -d/cdrom/cdrom0/sco/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/sco/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) Mounting the CD-ROM: If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0. Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):

33 NetVault Administrator s Guide 21 su root mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0 Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) Mounting the CD-ROM: If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0. Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists): su root mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0 Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) Mounting the CD-ROM:

34 22 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0. Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists): su root mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0 Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) Mounting the CD-ROM: If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automatically when you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0. Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists): su root mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0 Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

35 NetVault Administrator s Guide 23 UnixWare Mounting the CD-ROM: If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd/cdrom/uware213./install nvdist NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients. UnixWare 7 Mounting the CD-ROM: If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists): su root mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom Installing the NetVault Software: 1. Log on as root. 2. Run the command: cd/cdrom/uware7 pkgadd -d/cdrom/uware7/simage (for NetVault Server installation), or pkgadd -d /cdrom/uware7/cimage (for NetVault Client installation). NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set the security password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

36 24 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements When the NetVault server software is installed, the installation includes a NetVault Database directory (db or nvdb) containing four sub-directories: n Install (tiny- 'modules' binary file detailing modules installed). n Keys (tiny- licence key files for the main software and any plugins). n MediaDatabase (LARGE after a while! - holds records for media and backups performed). n ScheduleDatabase (small <10 Mbytes - holds records for all backup and restore jobs). The only portion of the database for which size requirements are an issue is the MediaDatabase. The NetVault Administrator of a particular NetVault domain must estimate the anticipated size of the database to properly allocate adequate disk space for growth. To calculate the space requirements, you must have the following information: 1. The approximate number of files and directories being backed up in the NetVault Domain (i.e. on the NetVault server and all NetVault clients). Each file and directory backed up requires 60 bytes for an index entry in the NetVault Database. 2. How many generations of each file are being kept. Each generation is a separate instance of a file or directory backup. For example, if the same file is backed up seven times, using default backup settings, there are said to be seven generations of the file held on media and indexed in the NetVault Database. By default, backups have an infinite life (i.e. the number of generations increases for every backup, causing the NetVault Database to continuously grow in size). Most systems cannot handle this amount of storage requirement, so it is part of the NetVault Administrator's tasks to ensure that a suitable Backup Life is applied to each backup (a setting found in the Advanced Options tab of the NetVault Backup window). Information on the Backup Life option can be found in Using Help (page 5) and in Backup Life (Backup only) (page 274). One example of calculating the NetVault Database size requirements is: If 200,000 files and 15,000 directories are backed up once, approximately 13 Megabytes for the NetVault Database indexing is required. If the same files and directories are backed up three times, 39 Megabytes would be required. Under normal circumstances, it is reasonable to set a Backup Life option of Discard after 7 Full Backups for File System backups. With this option set, only seven generations of files/directories are retained (using the File System plugin) for a particular backup selection. On the eighth backup, the first

37 NetVault Administrator s Guide 25 backup set of files/directories is discarded and removed from the NetVault Database index. A formula for estimating the space requirements (in bytes) for a number of machines is: Approximate number of files and directories backedupper machine X Approximate number of generations to be kept using Backup Life options X Number of machines backed up X 60 NOTES: (1) For some types of backup (e.g. online backup of some databases) it is necessary to keep a very large number of generations. Consult Technical Support (page 6) if space considerations are likely to be an issue. (2) Some Backup Life settings may not clearly indicate the likely number of generations. For example, when choosing the 'Discard after 25 weeks' setting, the number of generations kept depends on how many times you actually do this backup within the 25 week period. Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s NetVault plugins and APM s are installed and removed from the NetVault Client Management window. A NetVault plugin or APM can be installed on any client of the NetVault server appearing in the Server Selection list. NOTE: NetVault software includes a number of plugins which are automatically installed. They are the Consolidated Backups, Data Copy, Consolidated File System Backups and Raw Device plugins. If you delete any of these plugins you must reinstall NetVault to get them back. APM s can be installed and uninstalled as desired. Installing a Plugin or APM 1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Client Management command. 2. Select the desired client in the Clients list.

38 26 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software 3. Right-click and choose Install Software from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure: 4. Navigate to and select the appropriate installation software. 5. Click Open to begin the installation process. When the installation is complete, a successful installation message appears in the Install Software dialog box. Removing a Plugin or APM 1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Client Management command. 2. Select the desired client in the Clients list. 3. Right-click and choose Remove Software from the pop-up menu. Licenses for NetVault Products Once installed, the NetVault software is operational for an evaluation period of 45 days. To license purchased products, locate your machine IDs, contact BakBone Technical Support (page 6) for a license and then install the License Key. Each of these steps is detailed in the following sections.

39 NetVault Administrator s Guide 27 Locating Machine IDs To get the IDs of your NetVault machine (normally the NetVault server): 1. Open the NetVault Client Management window, by clicking the Client Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Client Management command. 2. Select the machine to be licensed in the Clients list. 3. Choose Properties from the pop-up menu to open the Client Properties dialog box: The Machine ID is displayed in the System tab.

40 28 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Requesting your License Key To request a NetVault License Key, provide the information on the Activation Key Request form to your local BakBone contact. n Serial Number (as displayed on the label in the CD-ROM case - e.g., ). n Company. n Contact Name. n Street Address. n City. n State. n Zip/Postal code. n Country (if located outside the United States) n Phone Number. n Fax Number. n . n Reseller/Distributor. n Machine ID of NetVault Server and any applicable Value-added Application Plugin Modules purchased for and installed on that machine. Local BakBone Contacts Send your completed license request form/information to your local BakBone contact as follows: Area Fax Web* Asia Pacific Rim [email protected] apac_keyrequest.asp Europe [email protected] N/A uk_keyrequest.asp Unites States [email protected] keyrequest.asp *When you complete the Activation Key Request form on the web site and click Submit it will be sent automatically to the proper location for processing. Installing a License Key A NetVault License Key is valid only for the Machine ID for which it is issued. License Keys are ed (or faxed) directly to the customer. It is recommended that the key

41 NetVault Administrator s Guide 29 be copied directly from the into the Enter Key String box to avoid possible errors. To install the license key: 1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Client Management command. 2. Select the desired machine from the Clients list. 3. Right-click and choose Install License Key from the pop-up menu, shown in the following figure: A dialog box appears as shown in the following figure: 4. Copy the new key information from the into the Enter Key String box. 5. Click OK.

42 30 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software If the license key is installed successfully, a message dialog box appears: 6. Click OK to complete the license key installation. Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault Upgrading NetVault depends on the NetVault version you are upgrading from. Use the following procedures as general guidelines only: Upgrading from NetVault to a Later Version Run the install program as if you are doing a new install (dependant on the OS, as described in the CD-ROM booklet): 1. The installation program will recognize that NetVault is already installed and the relevant software modules will be automatically updated. 2. There should be no problem regarding existing backup jobs or media created under Version Two new plugins are installed in a sub-directory of NetVault6: (1) the Data Copy plugin (for copying backups or backup sets from one item of media to another), and (2) the Consolidated File Server Backups plugin (which consolidates a Full backup and a number of incremental backups into a single backup saveset). These two new plugins are extras which can be installed into the active software and have no effect on what was done under Version Upgrading from NetVault to a Later Version To upgrade from NetVault to a later version, use the same steps as a new install procedure, as described in Installing NetVault Software (page 9). In addition, please note the following: 1. The installation program recognizes that NetVault is already installed and the relevant software modules are automatically updated. 2. Backup jobs performed using the Version UNIX File System plugin (under UNIX) and NT File System plugin (under NT) are automatically altered to use the new unified File System plugin introduced under Version Scheduled file system plugin jobs remain in the schedule after a reboot, and will run as scheduled using the new File System plugin.

43 NetVault Administrator s Guide When upgrading a NetVault server or client for NT, it is necessary to re-create all NT Registry backups. Under NetVault these were performed using a separate NT Registry plugin; under NetVault the registry can be selected as the last item appearing under the File System plugin so that a backup of the NT Registry can be included with any File System backup job for NT. 5. Devices are now added by default with the client name (i.e. NetVault name for the machine, not necessarily the machine name, on either a NetVault server or NetVault client) as the first item of the standalone drive or library name. Note that a device can be named almost any name you choose when adding a device and, in some circumstances, the user MUST enter a name other than the default name. General Guidelines for Upgrading NetVault n Backup your NetVault Database to a specific, identifiable item of media using the TargetMediaByMIDoption. n Make sure that you have enough time to do the upgrade and that everything is working properly before important backups need to be run. n Leave all normally used devices physically connected to the NetVault server (or client) machines and added to NetVault. This ensures that the device configuration data is properly upgraded. Common Upgrade Problems and Solutions When upgrading NetVault software installed using pkgadd (e.g. NCR MP-RAS and Solaris), the system may not allow the upgrade. For example: n In the file /var/sadm/pkg/install/admin/default (on an NCR MP-RAS box), there is a line that affects pkgadd upgrade: If instance=unique you must remove and then re-add a package. If instance=overwrite you can upgrade without removing and then re-adding a package. Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVault installation, even when the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. NetVault operates normally without the Configurator installed. There is no online help system for the

44 32 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software NetVault Configurator. For complete information on the Configurator, see Appendix F, Using the NetVault Configurator (page 335). Usually you will only use the NetVault Configurator to stop and re-start security settings. It is recommended that you use the other options in the dialog box only under the guidance of BakBone Technical Support (page 6). For basic informational purposes, the main items of interest in the dialog box are described in this section. Starting the Configurator To start the NetVault Configurator in a Windows NT environment: 1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator. To start the NetVault Configurator in a UNIX environment: 1. Change to the NetVault6/bin directory. 2. Issue the command:./nvconfigurator (or use./txtconfig for command line NetVault Configurator). Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box The NetVault Configurator dialog box contains a set of tabs that always appear in the dialog box. Information within these tabs vary depending on the installation circumstances. Machine tab The Machine tab details information about the machine on which NetVault is installed, including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key after product purchase. Information on the Machine tab includes the Machine name, ID, network name, IP addresses and software versions. This information is the same information available in the Client Properties dialog box of the NetVault Interface.

45 NetVault Administrator s Guide 33 The NetVault Configurator s Machine tab is shown in the following figure: License Tab The License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of Applied Keys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same as that available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault s Domain Management window. The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:

46 34 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Service Tab The Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, or after a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started. The Current State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab. When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking the appropriate buttons on the Service tab. Usually NetVault service is stopped only when configuration settings must be changed, and only on the advice of BakBone Technical Support (page 6). The NetVault Configurator s Service tab is shown in the following figure: Packages Tab The Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault plugin software. The plugin installation procedure is explained in Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locally on a NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from the NetVault server.

47 NetVault Administrator s Guide 35 The NetVault Configurator s Packages tab is shown in the following figure: Security Tab In the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or client installation. In addition, security can be disabled by selecting the Disable Security check box. When security is disabled, the machine can be accessed by any NetVault Server.

48 36 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software The NetVault Configurator s Security tab is shown in the following figure: General Tab If it becomes necessary to track down a problem in the NetVault program, you can generate debugging files in the General tab of the NetVault Configurator dialog box by selecting the Generate debugging files check box. The debugging trace files allow BakBone Technical Support (page 6) to find and correct problems in your NetVault software. The NetVault Configurator s General tab is shown in the following figure:

49 NetVault Administrator s Guide 37 Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature Under the direction of BakBone Technical Support (page 6), you can turn on or off the debugging (tracing) feature. This feature allows you to record the activities of the NetVault software in a file you can send to BakBone Technical Support for analysis. Turning on debugging 1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows. 2. Open the NetVault Configurator and select the Generate debugging files check box on the General tab. 3. Click Apply. 4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator. 5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button. A trace sub-directory is created in the NetVault6 directory. Trace log files are automatically created and updated as NetVault is used to track NetVault activities. NOTE: Trace files can become large quickly. Remember to turn off debugging as soon as the facility is no longer needed. Turning off debugging 1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows. 2. Open the NetVault Configurator and clear the Generate debugging files check box on the General tab. 3. Click Apply. 4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator. 5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button. Sending the File to BakBone Technical Support When you have finished capturing the NetVault activities and the file is complete, send the file to BakBone Technical Support for analysis. The following tips will assure that the file is properly received: n Reduce the size of the file by zipping (or compressing) it. n Upload the file to the FTP site (ftp n Make every effort to refrain from sending the file in . Because of the usually large size of these files you can overload the system, causing the arrival of the file to fail. n If you have any questions about the trace procedures, contact Technical Support (page 6).

50 38 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Configuring NetVault 6.x Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel If you are using an autoloader with a SCSI LUN, you must modify your operating system kernel. The kernel s configuration needs to be set up before you begin configuring NetVault. Here is a list of autoloaders that use LUNs. n HP SureStor DAT - 6 slot autoloader (12000E, 24x6, 40x6) n Sony TSL-A300C/A500C (AIT 1/2/4 slot) n Sony TSL-9000/11000 (DAT, 8-slot) n Seagate DDS4 Autoloader Settingupthekernel The following instructions define how to set up the kernel to increase the number of SCSI LUN s Linux will scan: CAUTION: Modifying the kernel on your system can cause boot problems. 1. Make a backup copy of /etc/lilo.conf (e.g. cp /etc/lilo.con /etc/lilo.conf.bak). 2. Modify the /etc/lilo.conf file. Use the default Linux kernel setting of LUN 0. If you d like your operating system to use LUN 1 or higher, you ll need to change the configuration file (/etc/lilo.conf) as follows: boot=/dev/hda5 map=/boot/map install=/boot/boot.b prompt timeout=50 image=/boot/vmlinux label=redhat5 root=/dev/hda5 initrd=/boot/initrd img read-only append= max_scsi_luns=8 3. Add the line to the end of the file using a text editor such as vi. For example, if you specify max_scsi_luns=8, NetVault allows Linux to recognize up to 8 LUNs (e.g. LUNs 0 through 7). 4. Update lilo using the command:

51 NetVault Administrator s Guide 39 # lilo 5. Reboot your system. 6. Confirm that the modification has been completed. The kernel automatically recognizes the SCSI device when rebooting. You can also confirm the changes using the Dmesg command after rebooting. An example of the output of the Dmesg command is shown in the following figure:?? (scsi0) <Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter> found at PCI 15/0 (scsi0) Wide Channel, SCSI ID=7, 16/255 SCBs (scsi0) Warning - detected auto-termination (scsi0) Please verify driver detected settings are correct. (scsi0) If not, then please properly set the device termination (scsi0) in the Adaptec SCSI BIOS by hitting CTRL-A when prompted (scsi0) during machine bootup. (scsi0) Cables present (Int-50 NO, Int-68 NO, Ext-68 YES) (scsi0) Downloading sequencer code instructions downloaded scsi0 : Adaptec AHA274x/284x/294x (EISA/VLB/PCI-Fast SCSI) 5.1.7/3.2.4 <Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter> scsi : 1 hosts. Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202 Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02 (scsi0:0:1:0) Synchronous at 20.0 Mbyte/sec, offset 8. Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202 Type: Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision: 02 NOTE: For more information on Linux SCSI settings, see Linux s SCSI- HOWTO.txt document. Uninstalling NetVault CAUTION: Uninstalling NetVault Software will remove all NetVault Database entries. This will result in loss of all backup records performed with NetVault. Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines 1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >Uninstall NetVault. 2. InstallShield will remove the Software Services, etc. If desired, click Yes to remove the shared library files located in %SystemRoot%\System32 directory. No other applications should be using these files. 3. Remove the ~NetVault6 installation directory.

52 40 Chapter 2 Managing NetVault Software Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines 1. Type pkgrm nv6server to remove a NetVault Server Installation, or type pkgrm nv6client to remove a NetVault Client. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software. Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations 1. Use the cd command to go to the NetVault installation directory, then go to the <path>/netvault6/util directory. 2. Type./nvuninstall at the command prompt. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software.

53 CHAPTER 3 NetVault Basics Graphical User Interface - 43 n MenuBar-43 n Command Toolbar - 45 n Status Line - 46 Managing Devices and Clients - 46 n Device Management Window - 47 n Client Management Window - 48 n Domain Management Window - 48 Managing Media - 49 n Media Management Window - 50 n Status Window - 50 Backing Up Data - 51 n Backup Window - 52 Restoring Backed Up Data - 53 n Restore Window - 53 Job Operations - 54 n Jobs Window - 54 n Logs Window - 55 Using Templates - 56 n Policy Management Window - 56 Searching for Data - 57 Selecting Items - 58

54

55 NetVault Administrator s Guide 43 Graphical User Interface The NetVault Graphical User Interface provides access to a variety of windows used to manage your hardware and software configurations, and storage. The main window of the interface appears, as shown in the following figure, when you start NetVault: The interface contains the menu bar, the command toolbars and the status line which are explained in this section. Information about the windows opened by these commands can be found in Managing Devices and Clients (page 46). Menu Bar The NetVault menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides access to the NetVault functions and operations. The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table: Menu Choose this command: To do this: File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where you can select the desired printer and specify its properties. Exit Close all open windows and dialog boxes and exit the program.

56 44 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Menu Choose this command: To do this: View Toolbar Turn on or off the display of the command toolbar containing shortcut buttons to the menu commands. Large Buttons Turn on or off the display of the large icon shortcuts to the menu commands. Font Open the Font dialog box where you can change font and font size. Operations Backup Open the Backup window where you can select items for backup, schedule jobs and set job options. Restore Open the Restore window where you can select backed up items to be restored, schedule jobs and set job options. Status Open the Status window where you can monitor device, client and job status and view operator messages. Media management Open the Media window where you can view details on media items. Job management Open the Job window where information is stored about jobs, their status and job histories. Logs Open the Log window where you can access log files. Administration Client Management Open the Client Management window where you can view and find information on the NetVault Clients and Available NetVault Machines. Domain Management Open the Domain Management window where you can view and find information on the Controlled Servers and Available NetVault Servers. Device Management Open the Device Management window where you can view logs and media requests for your devices.

57 NetVault Administrator s Guide 45 Menu Policy Management Opens the Policy Management window where you can define sets of options for schedules, target media and advanced options (backup life, compression, verification, duplication and pre and post scripting). Help Help Contents Display a description of and help for the current focus item. Help Index Display the Help Index. About Open the About dialog box showing product version number and license information. Command Toolbar Choose this command: To do this: The command toolbar, when displayed, is located directly below the menu bar in the NetVault interface and consists of shortcut buttons providing access to commonly used commands. These shortcut buttons can be displayed in two sizes: the small buttons on the command toolbar or as large buttons in the interface. The display of the command toolbar can be turned on or off by choosing the View Toolbar command. The display of the large command buttons is turned on or off by choosing the View Large Buttons command. The NetVault command toolbar (small buttons) appears as shown in the following figure: The NetVault GUI (large buttons) appears as shown:

58 46 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics The shortcut buttons, accessible from either the command toolbar or the large buttons, are described in the following table: Click this button For this command: Operations Backup Operations Restore Administration Client Management Administration Device Management Operations Status Operations Media Management Operations Job Management Operations Logs Status Line The Status Line, located at the bottom of the NetVault window, displays a description of the command over which the cursor is currently placed. An example of the information displayed when the cursor hovers over the Media Management command button, is shown in the following figure: Managing Devices and Clients The NetVault interface includes windows which allow you to manage your clients, domains and devices. This section gives a brief description of the windows used to manage the devices, clients and client domains.

59 NetVault Administrator s Guide 47 Device Management Window All backup devices (including simple tape drives, tape libraries, disk-based pseudolibraries, CD Writers, Optical Drives, etc.) are controlled by a NetVault server. Devices can be attached directly to the NetVault server computer or be distributed among the clients of the NetVault server. The NetVault Device Management window provides the means to control the devices on the servers. The NetVault Device Management window opens when you click the Device Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration Device Management command, and is shown in the following figure: The options available on the NetVault Device Management window are: n Server Selection: Alistofservers. n Devices: Lists the devices currently controlled by the selected NetVault server. Devices you intend to control through the NetVault Device Management window must be added by choosing one of the Add commands. The Devices tab provides access to Library and Drive commands used to check status, modify libraries, remove devices, check drives, and other functions used in managing the devices. n Device Logs: A list of the log messages recorded for activity on the devices which were or are currently under the control of the selected NetVault server. n Media Requests: Contains all currently active requests for media. Once a media request is filled as part of an active job, the media request is removed. For complete information on using the Device Management window, see Working with the Device Management Window (page 64).

60 48 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Client Management Window The NetVault Client Management window allows you to monitor, control and add NetVault Clients which are controlled by a NetVault server. The NetVault Client Management window opens when you click the Client Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration Client Management command, and is shown in the following figure: The options available in the NetVault Client Management window are: n Server Selection: Alistofservers. n Clients: An alphabetically ordered list of the current NetVault clients for the NetVault server selected in the Server Selection box. n Available NetVault Machines: A list of the currently known NetVault machines on the network and their current status: blue if available, red if unavailable. n Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines list. With this search you can find machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the local network. For complete information on using the Client Management window, see Working with the Device Management Window (page 64). Domain Management Window In NetVault network management, a single machine is configured as a NetVault server with one or more NetVault clients assigned to it. The server and its clients comprise a NetVault Domain. A server can be administered from the machine running the server software or from a remote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thus

61 NetVault Administrator s Guide 49 providing a Domain Management facility. This facility requires the installation of a NetVault GUI. The NetVault Domain Management window opens when you choose the Administration Domain Management command, as shown in the following figure: The NetVault Domain Management window is similar to the NetVault Client Management window. The options available in the window are: n Available NetVault Servers: The list of currently known NetVault servers on the network and their current status: blue if available, red if unavailable. With proper security, a server may be added as a Controlled Server. n Controlled Servers: The list of all NetVault servers which may be controlled from the selected server and their current status: blue if available, red if unavailable. With proper security, a Controlled Server can be added from the Available NetVault Servers frame. n Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault Server machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault Servers frame. Use this facility to find machines on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the local network. For more information on using the Domain Management window, see The NetVault Domain Management Window (page 117). Managing Media An important part of performing backups and restores for your data is being able to manage the media used to store the data, as well as schedule and run the backup and restore jobs. NetVault provides the windows used to supervise the performance of your media. This section describes those windows.

62 50 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Media Management Window The NetVault Media Management window provides access to information about the media associated with the selected server. The NetVault Media Management window opens when you click the Media Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Media Management command, as shown in the following figure: The options available on the NetVault Media Management window are: n Server Selection: Alistofservers. n Media: The list of media and backup savesets on the selected server. n Details: The tabs appearing in the Details frame vary, depending on the item selected in the Media frame. For selected media the tabs can include Details, Statistics, History, Library Info and Media Requests. Each tab provides details specific to the media such as location, space used, segments used and date written. When a job is active it also provides information used to administer media requests. When a backup saveset is selected, the tabs displayed are Backup, Segment 1 and Segment 2. Information displayed for a selected backup saveset can include the name of the server which controlled the backup, the name of the client the data was backed up from, the type of backup performed and more. For more information see Media Management (page 127). Status Window The NetVault Server Status window displays information on the current status of the selected server.

63 NetVault Administrator s Guide 51 The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Status button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Status command. The information in the NetVault Server Status window is divided into individual, sizable areas, as shown in the following figure: The areas in the NetVault Server Status window are: n Device Status: Displays the availability and state of each device on the NetVault server. n Client Status: Displays the state of each NetVault client on the NetVault server. n Job Status: Displays the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server. n Operator Messages: Displays all messages for jobs controlled by the NetVault server. For complete information on using the Server Status window, see The NetVault Server Status Window (page 141). BackingUpData The NetVault Backup window is where you select the data you want to back up, set backup and advanced options, choose the target media and schedule backup jobs.

64 52 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Backup Window The NetVault Backup window allows you to create, edit and submit backup jobs for NetVault clients. NetVault backup jobs transfer data from the NetVault client to a backup device whose media stores the data. The backed up data is then available to be restored to the originating client. The NetVault Backup window opens when you click the Backup button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Backup command, as shown in the following figure: Each of the tabs in the NetVault Backup window controls the functions and options available for backup jobs. Complete information on using the NetVault Backup window can be found in Backing Up Data (page 157). n Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the backup job. For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data (page 57). n Backup Options: Backup options vary, depending on the plugin or APM selection. These options control whether you do a full, differential or incremental backup, and if differential or incremental, specify the data you want to include. n Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whether they are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether they can be triggered to run by a command. n Target: Allows you to specify a particular device or media on which the data will be backed up. n Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression, verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information on the Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

65 NetVault Administrator s Guide 53 RestoringBackedUpData To recover backed up data, use the Restore window to select the data to be restored, set restore and advanced options, choose the target client and schedule the restore job. Restore Window The NetVault Restore window allows you to create, edit and submit restore jobs for NetVault clients. NetVault restore jobs transfer data from a backup device whose media stores the data to the NetVault client. The NetVault Restore window opens when you click the Restore button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Restore command, as shown in the following example: Each of the tabs in the NetVault Restore window controls the functions and options available for backup jobs. Complete information on using the Restore window can be found in Restoring Data (page 197). n Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the restore job. For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data (page 57). n Restore Options: Restore options vary, depending on the plugin or APM selection. These options control whether a restore job can overwrite existing data, create backup files or change date and time stamps. n Target Client: Allows you to select the client where you want the data to be restored.

66 54 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Job Operations n Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whether they are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether they can be triggered to run by a command. n Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression, verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information on the Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271). The NetVault Jobs window allows you to monitor the performance of and schedules for your backup and restore jobs. This same window also gives you access to historical job information for completed jobs. The Logs window is available to view job logs created during backup and restore job operations. The job logs record what happened while the job was running, including operation messages issued and any warnings or errors that may have occurred. With the job logs, problems can be identified and corrected before the same circumstances are applied to new jobs. Jobs Window The NetVault Jobs window contains information relevant to jobs submitted by the NetVault server that are completed, running and scheduled to run. The Job Manager runs on the NetVault server to monitor plugins and device managers on other machines to complete a task. The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Job Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations Job Management command, as shown in the following figure: The options available on the NetVault Jobs window are:

67 NetVault Administrator s Guide 55 n Status: The Status tab lists the completed, running and scheduled jobs. Running and scheduled jobs can be controlled by choosing different commands in the pop-up menus. Completed jobs can be viewed and edited. Scheduled jobs can be viewed, edited, deleted from the schedule and placed on hold. You can also monitor, view, edit and abort running jobs. n Jobs: Displays the list of jobs in the NetVault database. Jobs listed here do not have to be active; a series of jobs can be created, saved with different names and submitted later. n History: The list of all jobs that have been run. For more information on using the Jobs window, see Job Management (page 239). Logs Window The NetVault server centralizes all logs in a NetVault domain, assuring that the logs from the server and the clients are gathered in a single location. The NetVault logging utility pre-allocates disk space for the log storage so that logging continues even if the system runs low on disk space. The NetVault Logs window opens when you click the Logs buttononthecommand toolbars or choose the Operations Logs command, as shown in the following figure: Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault server selected are listed in the NetVault Logs window. Logs can be filtered to display only those who meet specified filter options, such as Warning Levels, date ranges, clients, etc. For complete information on using the NetVault Logs window, see Using Logs (page 249).

68 56 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Using Templates In most of the backup and restore jobs that you do, the same set of options can be applied. The Policy Management window can be used to define and store sets of options that can be re-used in many of your backup and restore jobs. Policy Management Window NetVault allows you to define and save templates that can be re-used in many different backup or restore jobs. When modifications are required they can be done in the saved template and automatically applied to the backup or restore jobs that use that template. The templates you design and save are called Sets. Sets are defined in the NetVault Backup, NetVault Restore and NetVault Policy Management windows from the appropriate tabs. The following list shows the available sets: n Schedule Set: Defines the date and time the job is to run and whether it runs once or repeats many times. This set can be applied to both Backup and Restore jobs. n Backup Selection Set: Used in selection of data to be backed up. n Backup Target Set: Used to set the devices, media and general options for the backup targets. n Backup Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and pre and post script options for a backup job. n Restore Selection Set: Used in selection of backed up data to be restored. n Restore Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and script options for a restore job.

69 NetVault Administrator s Guide 57 The NetVault Policy Management window is opened by choosing the Administration Policy Management command, and appears as shown in the following example with the Schedule tab displayed: At the bottom of each tab you can name and save a Set of options and load, modify and delete a Set you previously saved. For more information on using Save Sets and working with the Policy Management window, see Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263). Searching for Data Whenever data has been backed up, it can be restored. The Search facility allows you to find the backed up data at the client, plugin and backup saveset levels. When you select a Client, Plugin or backup saveset, right-click and choose Search from the popup menu, the Restore Search window opens, as shown in the following figure: In the Restore Search dialog box, you can specify a string of characters in the Search String box that must be present in the backed up data you want to find, use a Regular Expression Search and search for Case Sensitive characters. In addition, wildcard characters can be used to expand the results of your search. For more information on Regular Expressions, see Using Regular Expressions (page 315).

70 58 Chapter 3 NetVault Basics Selecting Items By carefully selecting the items you want to backup or restore, you can reduce the time it takes to run the backup and restore jobs and, subsequently, minimize the time data is unavailable to your users. Items are selected or cleared by clicking a square located to the left of the item. The following example shows how the individual items in a Microsoft SQL Database Backup are included or excluded by selection: n The green check next to the master item indicates that the entire database is selected. When the green check is present at this level, all sub-items are automatically selected. n The red X next to the spt_datatype_info and spt_datatype_info_ext items indicates that these items are excluded from the selection. When selecting items, it is important to remember: n A selection at the top, or master, level automatically selects all its sub-items and indicates the selection with a green check. n If the master level is opened, and all sub-items selected, then the master item is automatically selected. n When the master level is selected (making all sub-items selected), individual sub-items can be excluded by clicking the green check box. The now excluded sub-item is indicatedwitharedx. n If the master level is opened but not selected, individual items not selected are indicated by the blank square.

71 CHAPTER 4 Device and Library Management What are NetVault Devices? - 61 n Device Types - 61 n Device Connections - 61 n Devices in a Windows NT Environment - 63 n Shared Devices - 63 n Setting up a Device - 63 n Planning a Shared Device Installation - 61 Working with the Device Management Window - 64 n MenuBar-64 n Window Tabs - 65 n Icons and Drive Lights - 65 n The Devices Tab - 66 n The Device Logs Tab - 71 n The Media Requests Tab - 72 Adding NetVault Devices - 77 n Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client - 77 n Adding Libraries - 81 n Adding a Shared Library - 87 n Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients - 91 n Adding Devices in Windows n WorkingwithFirewalls-94 n Creating Virtual Libraries - 94 Scanning Drives and Media - 94 n Scanning for Shared Drives - 94 n Scanning Media - 95 Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97 n Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97 n Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots - 98 n Setting the Life of Cleaning Media n Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval n Manually Cleaning Media - 101

72

73 NetVault Administrator s Guide 61 What are NetVault Devices? A NetVault device is any single piece of equipment designated to store the data you need to preserve or backup. NetVault is designed to use a wide variety of storage devices from single drives (including disk, tape and DVD-RAM) to libraries of the same in any combination. The majority of NetVault devices use the SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) standard, and in most cases, a device is automatically recognized as it is added. Most devices use tape media, but NetVault also works well with disk-based and optical media. NetVault device templates simplify the way devices are added under any operating system where NetVault is installed. Device Types NetVault devices fall into two categories: n Simple Devices: Normally a single drive device requiring manual intervention to change media. n Libraries: Libraries can be configured as single-drive, random tape libraries (stackers), multi-drive (random) tape libraries (jukeboxes), sequential devices, autochangers, autoloaders, disk libraries, etc. Device Connections NetVault devices are controlled by a NetVault server. They can be attached directly to the NetVault server or distributed across the clients of the server. These devices are known as Client Transfer Nodes (CTN). Multi-drive devices can be completely controlled by one NetVault server/client or shared among more than one NetVault server/client. Planning a Shared Device Installation DirecSan devices are NetVault devices (e.g. tape drives) that can be shared between two or more machines using shared-scsi or a SAN (Storage Area Network) connection. In this section you will learn how to set up a simple shared- SCSI device between two machines, and how to use a SAN connection. Setting up Simple Shared-SCSI Devices (2 machines) The simplest way to set up shared devices between two machines is to use standard SCSI cabling. The information provided here is a general guide only and subject to change. For the latest information, please contact Technical Support (page 6).

74 62 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management Requirements for using shared-scsi include: n The two machines must be physically close enough to each other so that the maximum recommended cable lengths for the type of SCSI cabling in use and number of connections are not exceeded. n The two machines must be running a main operating system supported by NetVault (i.e. Microsoft Windows NT, or most versions of UNIX). Note that the two machines DO NOT have to be running the SAME operating system. n Each machine must contain a suitable SCSI ID configured to each SCSI Adapter Card. n The device(s) to be used (either Standalone Drive or Library) must have SCSI IN and OUT connectors. Note that stackers, jukeboxes and autochangers are all classed as Libraries by NetVault. n The SCSI cabling is set up to 'daisy-chain' between the SCSI Adapter Card on one machine, via all of the device SCSI connections, to the SCSI Adapter Card on the second machine. n Each machine must have either NetVault client or NetVault server software installed and the NetVault License purchased must allow for the required number of Client Attached (distributed) Devices. Note the following information: n Each standalone or library drive can be added as shared by both machines, or or be configured for exclusive use by one machine. n Each drive is seen as a local drive to the NetVault machine to which it is added. n A library robotic arm connection must be added by NetVault to only one of the two machines. Once the hardware device(s) and NetVault software installation is complete, the shared device(s) can be added to the NetVault Device Management window, by choosing either the Add Standalone Drive or Add Library commands. For more information on adding standalone, shared devices, see Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client (page 77). Information on adding shared devices is available in Adding Libraries (page 81). Using a SAN (Storage Area Network) NetVault s DirecSan (Dynamic Drive Sharing) combines the ability to attach devices to clients (Client Transfer Nodes - CTN) with SAN connections, providing centralized tape storage and the sharing of drives (Shared CTN) within the SAN. Once the SAN has been set up, the shared device(s) can be added to the NetVault Device Management window, by choosing either the Add Standalone Drive or Add Library command, as appropriate.

75 NetVault Administrator s Guide 63 Refer to Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client (page 77) or Adding Libraries (page 81). Devices in a Windows NT Environment NetVault works with the standard NT system drivers installed, but it is recommended that fast tape drive devices be placed under NetVault s own NT drivers. You must assure that the SCSI addresses are correctly recognized by the BIOS and later NT when the machine is started or rebooted. To check for system drivers installed under NT 4.0: 1. Choose Start>Settings>Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Tape Devices icon to open the Tape Devices dialog box, shown in the following figure: The list of tape devices installed in your system is displayed. 3. Click the Drivers tab to display the tape device drivers on your system. 4. Select all of the drivers to be removed and click the Remove button. Shared Devices NetVault devices can be shared between two or more machines using shared- SCSI, a SAN or DirecSan connection using standalone drives and drives in a library. A shared drive can be used by NetVault as a local drive while backing up the client. This allows data to be efficiently transferred via the network. Even if a drive is physically shared between two or more machines, it can be added to NetVault for exclusive use by one machine, or shared by specific, connected machines. SettingupaDevice Before you can start using NetVault, at least one device must be added. NetVault can use various types of media including tape and DVD-RAM for simple devices

76 64 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management and libraries, and hard disks set up as pseudo tape libraries. Once a device is added, it appears in the NetVault Device Management window. Before trying to add a SCSI tape device to NetVault, make sure that it is recognized by your operating system. NOTE: DVD-RAM devices are slow when writing to them. To improve this process, NetVault compresses data before writing by default. This can be turned off in the Device Management window if desired Working with the Device Management Window The Device Management window provides access to all the commands and functions needed to manage your NetVault devices. To open the Device Management window, click the Device Management button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration Device Management command, and is shown in the following figure: Options available in the window are: Menu Bar The Device Management menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides access to the NetVault functions and operations.

77 NetVault Administrator s Guide 65 The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table: Menu Choose this command: To do this: File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where you can select the desired printer and specify its properties. Print Open the Print dialog box where you can choose the desired printer and properties before printing. Close Close the window. Add Add Library Add a library. Add Standalone Drive Add a standalone drive. View Devices Open the Devices tab. Device Logs Open the Device Logs tab. Media Requests Open the Media Requests tab. Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic. Help Contents Open the help system. Window Tabs Information available in each of the tabs in the Device Management window is described in the following table: Window Tab Devices Device Logs Media Requests Icons and Drive Lights Provides Information about: The control functions for all devices currently controlled by the NetVault server. For devices to be controlled in this area, they must be added with the Add commands. Log messages for devices which are, or have been, under the control of the selected NetVault server. Currently active requests for media. Once the media request has been satisfied as part of the job progress, the media request is removed. Each item listed in the Devices tab of the Device Management window is displayed with a picture indicating specific information about the item. NetVault uses a

78 66 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management combination of icons and colored lights that explain device types and status, as explained in the following tables: Icons Provides Information about: Library - with status indicating light of green if functional. Drive - with status indicating light (see Drive Lights table below for explanations). Slot - Library media slot (with media identity, unless empty). Port - Entry/Exit port enabling media to be imported or exported without opening the main library door. Drive Lights Provides Information about: Green Light - The drive is available and not in use. Yellow Light - The drive is currently in use. The Devices Tab Red Light - The drive is not available, and there could be a problem with it. The Devices Tab lists the libraries, drives and entry/exit ports for the selected server:

79 NetVault Administrator s Guide 67 Pop-up Menu Commands The pop-up menu commands in the Devices tab of the Device Management window vary, depending on the item selected: library, drive or entry/exit port. Each of the tables below describe the commands for the item selections: Library Commands This Library Command Status Modify Remove (Device) Open Door Open Entry/ Exit Door Closed Entry/Exit Closed Does this: Opens a simple Status dialog box for the library, showing its name, machine and whether or not it is online. Opens the Modify Library window where library configurations can be modified. Removes a selected library or simple drive from Device Management upon confirmation. Opens the main door of the library. When the selected door is open, this command changes to Door Closed. TheDoor Closed command is used to hand the library back to NetVault control. Physically removes media from or adds media to the Entry/Exit Port. When the Open Entry/Exit command is chosen, this menu item changes to Entry/Exit Closed. The Entry/Exit Closed command is used to hand the library back to NetVault control. Hands the library back to NetVault control. When NetVault gets control it checks all media in the device before allowing any other actions to be taken. NOTE: With many libraries, choosing Door Closed will close the door without having to close it in the device control panel. Hands the library back to NetVault control. With some (but not all) libraries, you can choose the Entry/Exit Closed command to close the port without having to close it in the device control panel.

80 68 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management This Library Command Scan Does this: The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the NetVault database. This command can be used to import an item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR- EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a different NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be performed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be scanned first. For more information on scanning, see View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92). Drive/Slot Commands This Drive/Slot Does this: Command Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1) Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whether it contains media, 2) Media Information indicating read/write capacities, errors and times, 3) Library Info identifying the library and the physical and logical slot positions, and 4) Cleaning describing date/time, data transferred, errors and time in use since last cleaning (this tab appears only when a device is designated for cleaning). Load Loads the media in the slot into an available drive. Check Clean Causes the drive to self-test. Choosing the Check command when a drive is showing a red indicator often makes the drive available again. Useful for checking for media after it has been loaded into a simple drive. Submits a request to NetVault to clean the selected drive; a message confirming the clean cycle request appears. If the request is not possible (i.e., the device is busy or offline, a cleaning cartridge is unavailable, etc.) an appropriate message is displayed.

81 NetVault Administrator s Guide 69 This Drive/Slot Command Clean Properties Life Configure Re-use Blank Properties Export Unload Media Status Does this: Opens the Cleaning Interval dialog box where you can set one or more of the following options to control when a drive is cleaned: the number of days between cleaning cycles, the amount of data transferred in gigabytes, the number of hours in use, and the number of soft read/write errors encountered. Opens the Cleaning Media Properties dialog box where you can set the desired number of lives (or cleaning passes) for a cleaning device. Opens the Edit Drive dialog box where advanced configuration settings can be changed to maximize drive performance for a particular use and statistics gathered. Enables the selected media to be re-used by NetVault after confirmation. When media is marked to be re-used, it can be overwritten by future backup jobs. Blanks a previously used media item after confirmation that you will lose all data on the media. Allows you to view/edit labels for a selected media item (new or re-used). Also allows you to view the current labels and tape format. NOTE: It is not possible to change the label of media in use without losing the data currently stored on it. Transfers the selected media to the Entry/Exit Port so that it may be removed from the library. Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designated slot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected. Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensive information on the media status.

82 70 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management This Drive/Slot Command Scan Does this: The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the NetVault database. This command can be used to import an item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR- EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a different NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be performed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be scanned first. For more information on scanning, see View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92). Entry/Exit Port Commands This Port Does this: Command Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1) Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whether it contains media, 2) Statistics indicating how much data was read/written, how many errors were read/written and when the data was read/written, and 3) Library Info identifying the library and the physical and logical slot positions. Unload Media Status Scan Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designated slot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected. Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensive information on the media status. The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selected media to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in the NetVault database. This command can be used to import an item of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR- EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a different NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVault Server installation on the same machine). No restores can be made from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must be scanned first. For more information on scanning, see View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and click the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

83 NetVault Administrator s Guide 71 The Device Logs Tab The Device Logs tab lists all log messages for the devices currently under control of the selected NetVault server. An example of the Device Logs tab is shown in the following figure: Information available on the Device Logs tab include: n Log Messages: The log messages listed here are also available in the NetVault Logs window where a filter can be applied to select specific logs. For more information on using the Logs command, see Using Logs (page 249). n Warning Level: The color indicators used here are also used in the NetVault Jobs window. See Using Logs (page 251) for more information. n Exclamation Marks: An exclamation mark inside the warning level dot indicates that additional information is available for the log message. When the exclamation mark is inside the dot of a Backup job, and you doubleclick it, the Transfer Information dialog box opens:

84 72 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management When you double-click an error dot, the View Log Context dialog box opens: The Media Requests Tab Media Request messages are displayed when a job is active. Normally, when a job completes successfully, the Media Request disappears. If a problem is encountered, the job is paused until the media request is fulfilled. For instance, a Media Requests occurs when you have used Target Media during a backup job and the specified media is not available to the device. Media Requests are identified with both a Request number and the related Job number. In addition, the Priority Number and any relevant message concerning the media request is displayed. The Media Requests tab is shown in the following figure:

85 NetVault Administrator s Guide 73 The commands available when you right-click a media request are described in the following table: Media Request Command Status Diagnose Put on Hold Take off Hold Set Priority Does this: Opens the Media Request Status dialog box to view the statistics of the job s request for media. For more information, see Media Request Status Dialog Box (page 73). Opens the Diagnose Media Request dialog box to view information about how the media request is set up. For more information, see Places the job on hold. Removes the hold, placing the job back in the queue. Opens the Set Request Priority dialog box where you can change the priority level for the selected job, see Set Priority Dialog Box (page 76). For more information on setting default priority levels, see Setting Default Priorities (page 76). Media Request Status Dialog Box When a Media Request is selected, and the Status command chosen from the popup menu, the Media Request Status dialog box opens:

86 74 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained in the following table: Information Item Request Request type Status Priority Job Requesting Machine Drives Media Re-use media Required amount of media Force first backup Label automatically Mark media read-only on completion Explanation The identifying number for the media request. Whether the media request is for a backup or a restore. The current status of the job. This example shows that there is No Suitable Media Available. This could mean that the Target Media is not in the device. The priority assigned to the media request. The related Job Number. The NetVault machine requesting the media. Specifies which drive(s) the media request applies to. In this example, the backup may only use a library drive (the DLT drive within the Exabyte EXB-210), so only this library drive is listed. Specifies which media the media request applies to. In this example, the backup targeted specific media - New DLT Tape 4. This is the Media Label (MID) of the media which is required for the backup. Allows you to designate the selected media for re-use. Details the setting of Backup - Target, General Options setting Specify minimum space required on media before backup. In this example, this parameter is not set. Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Options setting Ensure this backup is the first on the media was specified. Details whether or not the Backup - Target, Media Options option Automatically label new or reused media was turned on. Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Options option Protect media from further writes after backup was turned on.

87 NetVault Administrator s Guide 75 Information Item Use media format Return media to slot on completion Force local drive Network Compression Under normal circumstances, this parameter is set to Default, meaning that any media format can be used. When a media format is specified (i.e., MTF), and a backup needs to span more than one item of media, if the first item of media uses MTF, then all others must also use MTF. A backup job cannot use mixed media formats. This parameter applies only to media in libraries. If the Library Return inactive media to slot delay parameter is set (in the Add Library - Configure dialog box or by choosing the Configure command on a selected library), the parameter specified is displayed here. Currently not available. Explanation Details whether or not the Backup - Advanced Options, Compression setting Network Compression has been specified. Diagnose Media Request Dialog Box When a Media Request is selected, and the Diagnose command chosen from the pop-up menu, the Diagnose Media Request dialog box opens: The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained in the table in Media Request Status Dialog Box (page 73).

88 76 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management Set Priority Dialog Box When a Media Request is selected, and the Set Priority command chosen from the pop-up menu, the Set Priority dialog box opens: The Set Priority dialog box allows you to change the priority of the selected job. NetVault backup and restore jobs are run in order of priority. Decrease the priority of a job to move it forward in the queue. Setting Default Priorities Default priority values are set in the NetVault Configurator, and are as follows: Types of Priorities Priority Number Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20 Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5 Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30 Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5 Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10 Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10 The following information applies to the types of priorities: n For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0 runs the request in the background. n A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup job requires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possible for a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. In order to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue without interruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to a smaller number than that of other requests.

89 NetVault Administrator s Guide 77 Adding NetVault Devices This section includes instructions on how to add devices to NetVault. You will learn how to plan and add a shared standalone device, search for shared devices and add a shared library. Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client This section teaches you how to add a standalone drive connected to two or more clients to NetVault. The example used here demonstrates how to add a single Quantum DLT 7000 drive to two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected to the drive via shared-scsi. One of the clients is running Windows NT while the other is running the Sun Solaris operating system. The rabbit client is the NetVault Server for this NetVault Domain. The NetVault Server (rabbit) has no added devices when you begin, and no backup jobs can be run. To add a drive, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Device Management command, as shown in the following figure:

90 78 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 2. Choose Add>Add Standalone Drive to open the Add Standalone Drive window, shown in the following figure: The Add Standalone Drive window contains these options: n Choose Drives: A list of the devices already connected to or available to be connected to the NetVault client. n Selected Drives - Displays a photograph of the added device, or a photograph of the generic type, as listed in the Type field. n Details: Displays a basic description of the device s capabilities. n Save details button: Click this button to store the added device. n Remove Drive: Click this button to delete a selected drive. n File Menu: Accesses the Save, Print Setup, Print and Close commands. n Help Menu: Opens the help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page. 3. Select the client rabbit, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The available standalone drives for the client are displayed in the Choose Drives list. The SCSI ID and device string for the drive are displayed. 4. Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu. If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to add the drive to the drive bay.

91 NetVault Administrator s Guide 79 The drive has been added for the first client. Normally the picture displayed in the Selected Drives frame and the information in the Type box match your drive. 5. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods: n Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select an additional NetVault client physically connected to this drive via shared-scsi or a SAN, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive is listed under the selected client. n Let NetVault automatically add all shared drives. 6. Right-click the drive and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu:

92 80 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management The drive has been added to the second client, as shown in the following figure: NOTE: You can manually add a drive to any number of clients connected to it. 7. Select the Standalone Drive and right-click to open the pop-up menu. The commands available are: n Configure: Click the Configure tab or select the desired drive, right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu to access the Configuration settings. For this example, there are no configuration settings. n Scan for shared drives: Choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-up menu to automatically detect and add any other clients sharing the drive. See Scanning for Shared Drives (page 94) for more information. If you select a drive, the pop-up menu adds the Remove commandsothatthe selected drive can be deleted. 8. Enter a suitable Device Name in the box. You cannot use a default name when a drive is shared. 9. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, save the settings for the added device by clicking the Save details button.

93 NetVault Administrator s Guide 81 The NetVault - Information dialog box message appears: The new drive appears in the NetVault Device Management window and starts to initialize. At first the drive containing media is displayed with UNKNOWN for the media and the yellow drive light, indicating it is being checked by NetVault. After the media has been checked, the drive light turns green. New media, or media previously blanked, is listed as BLANK. Media already in use under NetVault is listed with the Media Label it has been allocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is not known by your current NetVault database; if you wish to use this media, you will need to scan it. For information on scanning for shared devices, see Scanning for Shared Drives (page 94). Media which has been used under NetVault 5 will be marked as NetVault5 NT (or other OS). Media Formatted in some other manner will normally be marked as OTHER. Adding Libraries All Libraries to be controlled by a NetVault server are added via the Add Library window. A library can be added to the NetVault server itself as a client, or when using the Client Transfer Node facility, to a NetVault client controlled by the NetVault server. The example below explains how to add an Exabyte 18D Library, with single Quantum DLT 4000 drive, to a NetVault Client (richard) which is also the NetVault server. Before adding the device, the NetVault server does not have any devices added (so no backup can be run). Toaddalibrary: 1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Device Management command.

94 82 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 2. Choose Add Library to open the Add Library window, shown in the following figure: The Add Library window contains the following options: n Library Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which libraries are connected, and shows the libraries available to be added. n Drive Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which drives are connected, and shows the drives available to be added. The correct drive for each library drive bay must be selected. n Configure tab: Displays an overview of the complete library configuration and allows additional configuration to be set up using library (arm changer) and drive pop-up menus. n Save details: Stores the Library configuration modifications. 3. Select the client having the Library you want to add (for this example, select the richard client).

95 NetVault Administrator s Guide Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu, shown in the following example, or double-click the client. The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Device frame. NetVault normally displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (arm changer). 5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu. The library picture, Type and Details are displayed in the Selected Library frame and the library (arm changer mechanism) is selected. 6. Click the Drive Selection tab. 7. Select the NetVault Client (richard) in the Choose Drives frame.

96 84 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the libraries available to be added to the selected NetVault server s control. 9. Display the list of drives available to be added to the selected server s control by choosing the Open command from the pop-up menu for the selected NetVault Client.

97 NetVault Administrator s Guide Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu: IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay for each drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selecting the drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fitted to this library is connected by SCSI, so only one SCSI Tape drive appears. The drive is now added. The equipment picture in the Selected Drives frame and the Type will match the particular library. For a library with multiple drives, repeat the last step for each drive you want to add. IMPORTANT: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order is critical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive.

98 86 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 11. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), rightclick and choose Configure from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure: 12. Click the Save Details button to save the library configuration. The NetVault - Information dialog box displays a message that the library was added: The new library is displayed in the NetVault Device Management window and initialization is begun. At first, only the library and drive(s) are displayed. As each slot is initialized it is shown with a media of UNKNOWN.

99 NetVault Administrator s Guide 87 Other media types are: n Blank: New media or media previously blank. n Foreign: Media already used under NetVault is displayed with the Media Label it has been allocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is not known by your current NetVault database; if you wish to use this media, you will need to scan it. n NetVault5 NT (or other OS): Media used under NetVault 5. n Other: Media formatted in some other manner. Adding a Shared Library This section demonstrates how a Shared Library (Dynamic Drive Sharing) using a library with the arm-changer under the control of one client, but with one or more drive(s) connected to two clients, is added to NetVault. In this example, an ADIC FastStore Library, with a single Quantum DLT 7000 drive fitted, is added to two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected to the device via shared-scsi and are running different operating systems (Microsoft Windows NT and Sun Solaris, respectively). Note that the client rabbit is the NetVault server for this NetVault domain. Before adding the device, the NetVault server (rabbit) does not have any devices added, so no backups can be run. DirecSan, NetVault s Shared Client Transfer Node (SCTN) also uses this feature to support centralized tap library/device sharing when attached to a SAN. Adding Library and Drive(s) for the First Client (rabbit) 1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbars by choosing the Administration Device Management command.

100 88 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 2. Open Add Library to open the Add Library window: 3. Select the first client (rabbit) which will control the Library Armchanger. 4. Choose Open from the pop-up menu. The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Library frame. NetVault displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (arm changer). 5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu, shown in the following figure:

101 NetVault Administrator s Guide 89 The Library (arm changer mechanism) is selected. The library picture, Type and Details are displayed in the Selected Library window. 6. Click the Drive Selection tab. 7. Select the NetVault client in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selection tab. 8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the libraries available to be added to the selected NetVault server s control. 9. Select the NetVault client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the drives available to be added to the selected NetVault server s control. IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay for each drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selecting the drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fitted to this library is connected by SCSI, so only one Scsi Tape drive appears.

102 90 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 10. Select the desired drive in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selection tab, right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure: If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to add the drive to the drive bay. The drive has been added for the first client. Note that the picture under Selected Drives, and the information shown in the Type box, match your particular library. For a library with multiple drives, repeat the last step for each library drive to be added to the first client. WARNING: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order is critical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive. 11. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods: n Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select a NetVault client physically connected to this drive via shared-scsi or SAN, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive appears under this client. Continue this procedure with the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients (page 91). n Let NetVault add all shared drives automatically. Continue with this procedure using the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients (page 91).

103 NetVault Administrator s Guide 91 View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and click Save to store the settings. Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients 1. Make sure that the correct drive bay is selected in the Select for drive bay box. 2. Select the drive, right-click and choose Add Shared, as shown in the following figure: The drive is added to the second client, as shown in the following figure:

104 92 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management NOTE: You can manually add a drive to as many clients as are connected to it. 3. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), rightclick and choose Configure to change the configuration settings: 4. View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications and click the Save details button to store the settings. Adding Devices in Windows 2000 Devices or libraries being added to a Windows 2000 operating system cannot be under the control of the Windows 2000 Remote Storage Manager. To remove the library from the RSM control, follow these steps: 1. Right-click My Computer on your desktop. 2. Choose Manage from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure: 3. Double-click each level in the tree to display the desired device.

105 NetVault Administrator s Guide Right-click the device and choose Properties as shown in the following example, to open the Properties dialog box: 5. In the Properties dialog box, clear the Enable library option as shown in the following figure:

106 94 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 6. Click Apply and then OK to exit the dialog box. Working with Firewalls NetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferred across a secured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port ID s in the Valid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVault Configurator. The port identification must be configured on the machines with attached devices. Creating Virtual Libraries Your NetVault installation CD includes software that allows you to create virtual libraries and associated disk devices. Appendix E, Creating Virtual Libraries (page 329), contains information on how to load the software and then create the library. Scanning Drives and Media NetVault provides a scanning feature to help you find and add shared drives as well as find media that you can use to import from a different server. This section explains each of these functions. Scanning for Shared Drives After a drive has been added, you can direct NetVault to find and add all shared drives for the library. To do so: 1. Select the desired library. 2. Right-click and choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-up menu: The NetVault - Working dialog box informs you that NetVault is scanning.

107 NetVault Administrator s Guide 95 Please wait while the scanning function completes. You would NOT normally click Cancel. When the scan is complete, a message appears indicating that thescaniscomplete: When NetVault machines with this device attached are found, they are displayedinthenetvaultworkingdialogbox.intheaboveexample,amachine identified as /dev/nvscsi/sctl020 (HP C1533A) was found. 3. Click OK to close the dialog box. 4. Click the Configure tab to view the clients that can control the drive(s). Clients that control drives 5. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, save the settings by clicking the Save details button. Scanning Media If you want to import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previous installation of your current NetVault server), you may do so using the Scan function. The Scan function is also useful when you encounter problems with your media. You may be advised that the media needs scanning on the Details tab of the Media Properties dialog box. To scan media: 1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing the Administration Device Management command.

108 96 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 2. Make sure that the media is in a drive or library slot. In the following example, the media is a tape inserted into a simple drive: The media is displayed as FOREIGN if it is unknown to the NetVault Database of your installation. 3. Select the drive or library slot containing the media, right-click and choose Scan from the pop-up menu:

109 NetVault Administrator s Guide 97 The media will be scanned and details of the backups contained on it will be added to the current NetVault Database. The word FOREIGN should now be removed and the drive light should return to green. The media is now available for use in a backup or restore. Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots You can designate cleaning drives and slots in NetVault, set up an automatic cleaning cycle and determine how many times it can be used for cleaning. Operators can also manually trigger cleaning and view information about these activities in the Logs. In this section you will learn how to configure a cleaning drive/slot and where to go to set up and view cleaning options. Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots A drive or slot can be designated as a cleaning drive/slot when added or by modifying an existing one. A cleaning drive/slot cannot be used for any other purpose. If you dedicate cleaning slots, make sure it is noted to prevent attempts to use that slot for other operations. NOTE: When using shared drives, it is recommended that you set up cleaning abilities on only one client. To configure a drive/slot, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Device Management command. 2. Right-click the desired library and choose Modify to open the Modify Library dialog box. 3. Click the Configure tab to display the drives and slots in the library.

110 98 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management 4. Right-click the library, again, and choose Configure to open the Configure Device dialog box. 5. Click the Cleaning tab, as shown in the following figure: 6. Enter the appropriate information. Generally you would choose one of the following methods: n Barcode Prefix(es) of cleaning media: Enter one or more (separated by commas) barcode prefixes to identify the tapes used for cleaning. n Cleaning Slots: Enter the identification of the slots you want to use for cleaning. You can enter one or more (separated by commas). NOTE: If you want to remove the cleaning ability from a slot, open the Configure Device dialog box and clear the entry in the Cleaning Slots box. 7. Click OK to save the changes, exit the Configure Device dialog box and return to the Modify Library dialog box. 8. Click the Save details button to commit the changes. Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots To check the status of a cleaning drive, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window. 2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Status to open the Status dialog box.

111 NetVault Administrator s Guide Click the Cleaning tab for information, as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Status dialog box, Cleaning tab, includes: n Date Last Cleaned n Time Since Last Clean n Times Cleaned n Data Transferred Since Last Clean n Time in Use Since Last Clean n Soft Errors Since Last Clean 4. Click OK to exit the dialog box. To check the status of a cleaning slot, follow these steps: 1. With the Device Management window open, right-click the desired cleaning slot and choose Status to open the Status dialog box, shown in the following figure: Information available in the slot s Status dialog box, includes: n Name n Physical slot position n Logical slot position n Locked by This information is available for all slots.

112 100 Chapter 4 Device and Library Management Setting the Life of Cleaning Media A cleaning slot can be used a specific number of times. You can designate the number of times, or life, of a piece of cleaning media. To set the life of cleaning media, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window. 2. Right-click the desired cleaning slot and choose Life to open the Cleaning Media Properties dialog box, as shown in the following figure: 3. Click the up and down arrows (or enter the number) until the number of Lives you want appears in the box. 4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the dialog box. Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval Automatic cleaning routines can be easily defined in NetVault. To set up an automatic cleaning interval, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window. 2. Right-click the cleaning drive and choose Clean Properties to open the Cleaning Interval dialog box, shown in the following figure: In the Cleaning Interval dialog box you can set one or more options, as described below: n Days: The number of days between cleanings. n Data Transferred (Gb): The amount of data transferred in gigabytes. n Hours of Use: The number of hours the media has been in use.

113 NetVault Administrator s Guide 101 n Soft Read/Write Errors (x100): The number (in hundreds) of soft read/write errors that have occurred. Cleaning occurs when any one of the set options is encountered. For instance, if you set the number of Days to 3, cleaning happens every third day. If you want to clean media after a specific number of hours in use, set the Hours of Use to that number. If all the options are set, cleaning occurs when that criteria is met. 3. Click OK to commit the specified options and exit the dialog box. Manually Cleaning Media An operator can request media cleaning manually. To submit a request to clean media, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window. 2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Clean. 3. If there is nothing to keep the cleaning from occurring, a Clean Drive dialog appears confirming the request, as shown in the following figure: 4. Click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the Device Management window.

114

115 CHAPTER 5 Client Management Client Management The Client Management Window n Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box n Using the Clients List Box n Using Find NetVault Machine Adding a NetVault Client - 111

116

117 NetVault Administrator s Guide 105 Client Management All NetVault clients for the Server Selection are controlled by a NetVault server using the NetVault Client Management window, shown in the following figure: The NetVault Client Management window is used to monitor, control, and add the NetVault clients under the control of a NetVault server, as chosen from the Server Selection list. The list of machines that have NetVault loaded are automatically detected on the network and displayed under Available NetVault Machines. Any machine on the network, including other NetVault Servers, can be added as a client to the selected server. The Client Management Window The NetVault Client Management window contains the following options: n Server Selection: Displays the selected NetVault server and contains a list of servers that were added to the domain. n Available NetVault Machines: Displays a list of all currently known NetVault machines on the network, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to the selected NetVault server. n Clients: Lists all current NetVault clients of the selected NetVault server in alphabetical order with the most currently added client at the top of the list. n Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines area. This function is used to find

118 106 Chapter 5 Client Management machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the local network. n File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window. n Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page. Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box The Available NetVault Machines list box displays a list of all currently known NetVault machines on the network, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to the selected NetVault server. Icons The Available NetVault Machines list box indicates the status of NetVault machines using the following icons: Icon (blue) (blue) (red) Indicates: Available NetVault machine with NetVault password protection. This machine may be added as a NetVault client. Available NetVault machine without NetVault password protection. You may add this client without providing a password. Unavailable NetVault machine. This is usually a machine with NetVault installed, but is currently powered-off, or booted with a different operating system than used for the NetVault installation.

119 NetVault Administrator s Guide 107 Pop-up Menu Commands Choose this Command: Add As Client Remove Show Details Using the Clients List Box To do this: Add the machine as a client to the selected NetVault server. Remove the machine from the NetVault server. Open a dialog box which displays information about the selected NetVault machine. The Clients list box displays an alphabetically ordered list of all current NetVault clients for the selected NetVault server, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). Icons The Clients list box displays the status of NetVault clients using the following icons: Icon (blue) (blue) Indicates: Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection. This is normally a temporary state while the client is being added; once the client has been successfully added, the key is removed. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has been changed for the client since it was added. Available NetVault Client which has been successfully added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the NetVault server has good access to this client; if you are in doubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the client, then choose Check Access.

120 108 Chapter 5 Client Management Icon Indicates: Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine with NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted under a different operating system from the one containing the NetVault installation. Pop-up Menu Commands Choose this Command: Properties Remove Check Access Install Licence Key Install Software Remove Software Using Find NetVault Machine To do this: Open the Client Properties dialog box which displays System, Plugins and Installed Software information. Remove the machine from the selected NetVault server. Check how good the access is between the selected NetVault server and the selected client. Install a New Licence Key for the selected client. Also choose this command to install a new licence key for the NetVault server in the Server Selection box, which is usually the first client in the Clients list box. Install new NetVault software components. Remove any NetVault software components previously installed using the Install Software command. NOTE: Some installed components (e.g. patches or updates) are deliberately flagged so that they cannot be removed using this command. You can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVault machines on the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, you can find a NetVault machine on a different network (connected via a router, bridge, or gateway) and add it to the list.

121 NetVault Administrator s Guide 109 The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do: Searching for a Client by Machine Name 1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver). 2. Click the Find button. The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault Machines list box: See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110). Searching for a Client by IP Address 1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g ). 2. Click the Find button.

122 110 Chapter 5 Client Management The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault Machines list box: See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110). Reasons for Search Failures If the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Some of the possible reasons are: n The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS lookup table or your machine's host table, or your machine is not able to contact the DNS server. n The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed or running. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:

123 NetVault Administrator s Guide 111 n The machine you searched for is already in the list! Adding a NetVault Client NetVault is a Network backup solution, using a client/server architecture. A NetVault server controls the backup and restore activity for itself and a number of other machines, called NetVault clients, in a NetVault domain. A machine being added as a NetVault client requires: n NetVault client software installed. A NetVault client does not normally have a GUI (Graphical User Interface), although using the Custom install option, one can be added if necessary. A NetVault server can also be added as a NetVault client in another NetVault domain. n A NetVault Security Password. This is normally added during installation, but can be added later using the NetVault Configurator run on the local machine. You will need to know the password to add the client.

124 112 Chapter 5 Client Management Domain A NetVault 6 Server Unix / NT Tape Library Client Client Client Client Client Network SCSI Domain B Domain Admin NetVault 6 Server Unix / NT Client Client Client Client Client Client Client Tape Library Client Adding a NetVault Client 1. Open the NetVault Clients window. Make sure the correct NetVault machine is displayedintheserver Selection box. 2. Select the client you want to add from the Available NetVault Machines list. 3. Right-click the client, then choose Add As Client. SECURITY NOTE: Unless the Security has been disabled in the NetVault Configurator, Security tab, you must enter the NetVault Password to be granted access to this client.

125 NetVault Administrator s Guide 113 The Password Required dialog box opens: 4. Type the NetVault Password for this machine in the Enter Password box. 5. Click the OK button. If the password entered was correct and there were no network communication problems, the System Access Passed dialog box opens: NOTE: If the wrong password is entered when adding the client, right-click the client in the Clients list and choose Check Access; you can then enter the correct password. The System Access Passed message will appear when the security password has been entered correctly.

126

127 CHAPTER 6 Domain Management Domain Management The NetVault Domain Management Window n Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box n Using the Controlled Servers List Box n Using Find NetVault Machine - 121

128

129 NetVault Administrator s Guide 117 Domain Management NetVault is a network solution in which one machine is configured as a NetVault server with NetVault clients assigned to it. A single NetVault server and its NetVault clients make up a NetVault Domain. You can choose to administer the server from the machine running the server software, or from a remote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thus creating a Domain Management facility. A Domain Manager requires the installation of a NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface). In the NetVault Domain Management window you can designate an Available NetVault Server as a Controlled Server (with the proper security permissions). This sets the servers available in the Server Selection list of the general NetVault control windows. Any single Controlled Server can be set as the automatic default for the Server Selection list in all other windows. The NetVault Domain Management Window The NetVault Domain Management window is similar in layout to the NetVault Client Management window. To open the Domain Management window, shown in the following figure, choose the Administration Domain Management command: Options available in the window include: n Available NetVault Servers: The list of all currently known NetVault servers on the network (local area, wide area or the Internet), along with their current status (blue for

130 118 Chapter 6 Domain Management available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be added to the Controlled Servers area. n Controlled Servers: Displays a list of all NetVault servers which may be controlled from the selected server, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable. With the correct security password, servers may be added from the Available NetVault Servers list. n Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault server machine not currently listed in Available NetVault Servers. With this function you can find machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the local network. n File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window. n Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page. Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box The Available NetVault Servers list box displays a list of all currently known NetVault servers on the network (local area, wide area or the Internet), along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be added to the Controlled Servers area. Icons The Available NetVault Servers list box indicates the status of NetVault servers using the following icons: Icon (blue) (red) Indicates: Available NetVault server. This machine may be added to the Controlled Servers list. Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine which has NetVault installed on it which is currently switched off, or booted under a different operating system from the NetVault installation.

131 NetVault Administrator s Guide 119 Pop-up Menu Commands Choose this Command: Add As Server Show Details To do this: Add the selected Available NetVault Server to the Controlled Servers area. Open the NetVault Machine Details dialog box which displays information about the selected Available NetVault Server. NetVault Machine Details Dialog Box Right-click an Available NetVault Server and choose Show Details to open the NetVault Machine Details dialog box, shown in the following figure: The following information is included: n The NetVault name of the machine. n The Type of the machine (NT or UNIX). n UDP Fragment Size is the maximum size of a UDP packet. n Server. TRUE if the machine is a server, FALSE if it is a client. n Networks. A list of all the network addresses associated with the machine. n Fixed entry. Not used at this time. n Preferred Address. The network specified as the primary communication for that machine. n Contact Address. The network used by NetVault to communicate with the machine. n Id. The internal ID number. n Version. The internal version number. Using the Controlled Servers List Box The Controlled Servers list box displays the list of all NetVault Servers which can be controlled by the selected server, along with their current status (blue for

132 120 Chapter 6 Domain Management available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be added to the area from the Available NetVault Servers area. Icons The Controlled Servers list box displays the status of NetVault servers using the following icons: Icon (blue) (red) Indicates: Available NetVault Server which has been successfully added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the NetVault GUI has good access to this server; if you are in doubt as to how efficient the access is, check it by choosing the Check Access command. Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine with NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted under a different operating system from the one containing the NetVault installation.

133 NetVault Administrator s Guide 121 Pop-up Menu Commands Choose this Command: Properties Remove Make Default Check Access Using Find NetVault Machine To do this: Open the Server Properties dialog box which displays System, Plugins, Installed Software and Capabilities information. Remove the selected server from the Controlled Servers list. Make the selected NetVault server the default for the Server Selection list shown on most NetVault screens. Check how good the access is between the current computer and the selected NetVault server. You can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVault Machines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVault machines on the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, youcan find a NetVault machine on a network connected via a router, bridge, or gateway to the local network and add it to the list. The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do: Searching by Machine Name 1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver). 2. Click the Find button.

134 122 Chapter 6 Domain Management The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is successful, the NetVault Server (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault Servers list box. Searching by IP Address 1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g ). 2. Click the Find button. The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search is successful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVault Machines list box. Reasons for Search Failures If the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Some of the possible reasons are: n The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS servers list or your machine's host table. n The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed or running. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:

135 NetVault Administrator s Guide 123 n The machine you searched for is already in the list! n The machine has NetVault installed but is not a NetVault server.

136

137 CHAPTER 7 Media Management Media Management The Media Management Window n Using the Media List Box n Status Information in Details Area n Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu n Backup Saveset Information in Details Area - 135

138

139 NetVault Administrator s Guide 127 Media Management Managing the media you use to store your data is effortless with NetVault s Media Management utility. In the Media Management window you have access to all the information you need about your media. To open the Media Management window, shown in the following figure, click the Media Management button on the command toolbars or choose Operations Media management: The Media Management Window The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be examined for the selected server. The window contains a Media selection area and Details tabbed areas to allow different aspects of either the Media or backup saveset to be examined. The Media Management window contains the following options: n Media: This area is used to select either the Media (e.g. tape or virtual tape) or the backup saveset to be examined or controlled. n Details: This tabbed area provides status information on either the media or saveset selected. n File Menu: Accesses commands to Print Setup, Print and Close the window. n Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.

140 128 Chapter 7 Media Management Using the Media List Box The Media list box of the window contains the following options: Icons Icon Indicates: Media Group (with Group Label Name alongside) -Thisiconis only shown if a Group Label was defined when the media was first labelled (an advanced function). All media with this Group Label will be shown in an indented list directly beneath it. Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) - This icon represents Tape Media. If the media has been automatically labelled by NetVault, or manually labelled without a Group Label, the icon is shown on the left; otherwise it will be indented under the Media Group icon (as shown at the bottom). Virtual Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) -Thisicon represents Virtual Tape Media (actually a disk file). If the media has been automatically labelled by NetVault, or manually labelled without a Group Label, the icon is shown on the left; otherwise it will be indented under the Media Group icon (as shown at the bottom). Backup Saveset (with Job Title and Saveset Number alongside) - This icon represents a Saveset for a job written to the media. Note that a Saveset may span more than one media item, in which case it will be listed under each. Pop-up Menu Commands Choose this Command: Open Status Remove Re-use To do this: Open the media to display any Savesets. DisplaysatabbedsetofinformationintheDetails area. The actual tabs displayed can vary, but may include Details, Statistics, History Library and Media Requests. Remove the media selected from the NetVault Database after confirmation. Only offline media may be removed. If you decide to use it again to restore data from it, you will need to Scan it using the Device Management facilities to re-add the details to the database. Mark the media for re-use. Until the first new backup saveset is written to the media, the existing data may still be recovered by re-scanning the media (as above).

141 NetVault Administrator s Guide 129 Choose this Command: Properties To do this: Displays the Properties of the media which include: Media Label, Group Label, Offsite Location and Tape Format. Except for blank media, only the Offsite Location may be changed here. Status Information in Details Area When an item of Media is selected and the pop-up menu opened, as shown in the following figure, you can choose Status to display information in the Details area. The actual tabs appearing in the Details section can vary, but can include tabs for Details, Statistics, History and Library and Media Requests. Details Tab The Details tab appears as shown in the following figure:

142 130 Chapter 7 Media Management Typical information shown on the Details tab includes: Name Name Group Name Offsite Location Space Used Media Type Barcode Retire Media Description The title given to a specific piece of media. The name assigned to several pieces of media. The location of the media. Used to identify a media s origin when the media is imported to a new location. Graphically indicates how much space on the media has been used. If you require a quantity in Mbytes, please see Space Used in the Statistics tab. Details the type of media used, tape, disk file, etc. If the media has a barcode, it is displayed here. Indicates whether the device media should be discarded after a specified number of backups or period of time. Statistics Tab The Statistics tab appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the Statistics tab includes: Name Space Left Data Stored Number of Segments Description Indicates how much space is left on the media. This information is important when considering where backed up data should be placed. Shows how much data has been stored on the media. Details the number of media segments contained on an item of media.

143 NetVault Administrator s Guide 131 Name Date Last Written Date Last Read Description Shows when the media was last written on. The first four digits signify the year, the next two the month and the last two the day. The time is displayed in a 24 hour clock format. Shows when the media was last read. The date protocol is the same as Date Last Written. History Tab The History Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the History tab includes: Name Times Reused Read Errors Write Errors Total Data Written Total Data Read Description Indicates how many times the media has been used. Lists the number of Read Errors that have occurred. Normally you would see no errors. If there are errors it could indicate possible media or drive failures, and the cause should be investigated immediately. Lists the number of errors that have occurred writing data to the media. If there are errors it could indicate possible media or drive failures, and the cause should be investigated immediately. Indicates the amount of data written to the Media. This is a running total which spans any Reuse of the tape. Indicates the amount of data read from the Media. This is a running total which spans any Reuse of the tape.

144 132 Chapter 7 Media Management Library Info Tab The Library Info tab appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the Library Info tab includes: Name Name In Home Description The name allocated to the Library in the NetVault Device Management window. Shows the Drive where the media is located. Shows the Slot where media is located. Media Request Tab The Media Request tab is an administrative tool displaying information on NetVault media requests while a job is active. This information is useful when determining why a backup job using the media is paused and displays 'Waiting for Media' in the Job Status window.

145 NetVault Administrator s Guide 133 The Media Request Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the Media Request tab includes: Name Request Job Request type Status Requesting Machine Drives Description The identifying number for the media request. The related Job Number. Indicates whether the media request is for a backup or a restore. NOTE: The other parameters listed here are for a backup media request. The current status of the job. The NetVault machine requesting the media. Indicates which drive(s) the media request uses. In this example, the Backup was targeted to a single drive, the virtual library G:, DRIVE 1, so only this drive is listed.

146 134 Chapter 7 Media Management Name Media Required amount of media Force first backup Label automatically Mark media read-only on completion Use media format Return media to slot on completion Description Specifies which media the request uses. In this example, the Backup did not use target specific media, so 'Any' is shown. If the Backup uses target specific media, e.g. by Media Label (MID) or Media Group, then the appropriate identifier is shown. Indicates the setting of the Specify minimum space required on media before backup option in the Backup - Target, General Option tab. In this example, only media with at least 18 Mbytes free may be used. Indicates the setting of the Force first backup option. ensure this backup is the first on the media option in the Backup - Target, General Option tab. Indicates the setting of the Automatically label new or reused media option in the Backup - Target, Media Option tab. Indicates the setting of the Protect media from further writes after backup option in the Backup - Target, General Option tab. Normally this parameter will be set to default. This means that the default media format will be used (MTF for NT, or CPIO for UNIX). When a backup needs to span more than one item of media, if the first item of media uses MTF, then all other others must also use MTF (similar for CPIO, i.e. a backup job cannot used mixed media formats). This parameter applies only to media in Libraries. When the Library Return inactive media to slot delay parameter is set in the Add Library - Configure, Library Icon pop-up menu, Configure command, the specified parameter is listed here.

147 NetVault Administrator s Guide 135 Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu When a backup saveset is selected, and the pop-up menu opened, the Status command is available: Status command Backup Saveset Information in Details Area When the Status command is chosen for a selected backup saveset, information about the Saveset is displayed in the Details tabbed area. If a backup spans more that one item of media, the same Saveset number will be listed under all media used. The tabs that appear in the Details area can vary, but will always include a single Backup tab and at least one Segment tab. The Backup tab provides backup overview information and the Segment 1 tab contains data about the first backup segment. The Segment 2 tab appears only when the media is written using MTF (Microsoft Tape Format); the Segment 2 tab is a fixed 32 Kilobyte closing data section for MTF compliance.

148 136 Chapter 7 Media Management The Backup Tab TheBackuptabappearsisshowninthefollowingfigure: Typical information shown on the Backup tab includes: Name Job Title Server Client Plugin Backup Set Date Incremental Archive Generations Description This is the job number the request relates to. The name or title given to the backup job. The NetVault Server in control of the relevant backup. The NetVault Client for whom data had been backed up. Details the type of plugin used to carry out the backup. The Backup Set allows a particular backup to be saved and reloaded for use with more than one Backup Submission. This area will tell you the name of the Backup Set used, if any (e.g. Rich,e:\_test). The date and time when the backup occurred. Indicates if the backup is an Incremental type backup or a Full backup. Indicates if the backup has been marked as an archive If the backup is to be discarded after a specified number of full backups, the Generations detail shows the remaining number of backups available. For instance, if n (the number of full backups) has a value of 5, the generations counter is reduced by 1 each time there is a full backup. Once the generations reach 0, the backup is retired. Backup Life is set in the NetVault Backup, Advanced Options tabbed area. For more information about using Advanced Options, see Using the Advanced Options Tab (page 273).

149 NetVault Administrator s Guide 137 Retire Name Description The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER. Segment 1 Tab The Segment 1 tab appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the Segment 1 tab includes: Name Length Offset Position Block Size Total Time Transfer Time Retire Length Description The length of the segment in Mbytes. The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from the start of the backup. The first segment is always offset 0 bytes. Position of the segment on the NetVault media. The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved to the media in whole multiples of this block size, with the last block being padded out when required. Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs. The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to the segment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs. The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER. The length of the segment in Mbytes.

150 138 Chapter 7 Media Management Segment 2 Tab The Segment 2 tab, with information on a fixed 32 Kilobyte tape index section for MTF compliance, appears as shown in the following figure: Typical information shown on the Segment 2 tab includes: Name Length Offset Position Block Size Total Time Transfer Time Retire Length Description The length of the segment in Mbytes. The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from the start of the backup. In this example, as the first segment was 1.81 Mbytes long, the start of the second segment is offset by that amount. Position of the segment on the NetVault media. The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved to the media in whole multiples of this block size (the last block being padded out when required). Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs. The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to the segment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs. Is a date the backup will be retired, or NEVER. The length of the segment in Mbytes.

151 CHAPTER 8 NetVault Server Status The NetVault Server Status Window n Using the Device Status Area n Using the Client Status Area n Using the Client Status Area n Using Operator Status Area - 146

152

153 NetVault Administrator s Guide 141 The NetVault Server Status Window The NetVault Server Status window displays information on the status of the selected server. The window contains individual, re-sizable areas for the display of each type of information. Each of the areas is explained in the sections of this chapter. The NetVault Server Status window appears as shown in the following figure: The window contains the following information: n Device Status: Shows the availability and state of each device for the NetVault server. n Client Status: Shows the state of each NetVault client of the NetVault server. n Job Status: Shows the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server. n Operator Messages: Shows all Operator Messages for jobs controlled by the NetVault server. n File Menu: Accesses the commands used to Print Setup, Print and Close the window.

154 142 Chapter 8 NetVault Server Status n Operations Menu: Contains commands to open other windows: n Backup n Restore n Media Management n Job Management n Logs n Administration Menu: Contains commands to open other windows: n Client Management n Domain Management n Device Management n Policy Management n Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page. Using the Device Status Area The Device Status area shows the availability and state of each device for the selected NetVault server. Drive Lights Drives are shown with one of three colored lights: Drive Light Green Yellow Red Indicates: AdrivewithaGreen light, indicates that the drive is available and not in use. AdrivewithaYellow light, indicates that the drive is currently in use. AdrivewithaRed light, indicates that the drive is not available (and there could be a problem with it).

155 NetVault Administrator s Guide 143 Using the Client Status Area The Client Status area shows the state of each NetVault Client of the selected NetVault server. Icons The Client Status area shows NetVault clients using the following icons: Icon (blue) (blue) (red) Indicates: Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection. This is normally a temporary state while the client is being added; once the client has been successfully added, the key is removed. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has been changed for the client since it was added. Available NetVault Client which has been successfully added. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that the NetVault Server has good access to this client; if you are in doubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the client then choose Check Access. Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine with NetVault installed that is currently switched off, or booted under a different operating system from the one containing the NetVault installation. Using the Job Status Area The Job Status area shows the state of each job for the selected NetVault server. Jobs listed are all those submitted since the NetVault services were last started.

156 144 Chapter 8 NetVault Server Status Job Status Identification Jobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status: Icon Cyan Blue Yellow White Dark Blue Indicates: Jobs Scheduled, but not yet running. Jobs currently Running. Jobs Completed (not necessarily successfully). Selected Job (right mouse button for options). Pop-up Menu Commands A pop-up menu opens when you right-click a selected item. The commands available in the menu vary, depending on the current job status. The Status tab contains the same information as displayed in the Status area of the NetVault Server Status window; the descriptions below relate to both areas. Scheduled Job Area Pop-up Menus The Scheduled Job area (default color Cyan Blue) pop-up menu commands are: Choose this command: Edit/View Job Delete Schedule Hold Run Now To do this: Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window. This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. You may also double-click the log entry to perform the same function. Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deleted and continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary you can load the job into the appropriate backup or restore window and re-submit it later. Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection, this menu item changes to Resume which may be selected to re-activate the job as scheduled. Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to the job queue to run it as soon as possible.

157 NetVault Administrator s Guide 145 Running Job Area Pop-up Menus The Running Job area (default color Yellow) pop-up menu commands are: Choose this command: Monitor Job View Log Abort Job Edit/View Job To do this: Open the Job Monitor dialog box for the selected job. This provides both Job Information and Data Transfer information as the job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry to perform the same function. View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries). Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialog box opens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user. Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. Completed Job Area Pop-up Menus The Completed job area (default color White) pop-up menu commands are: Choose this command: View Log Edit/View Job Run Now To do this: View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries). Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to the job queue to run it as soon as possible.

158 146 Chapter 8 NetVault Server Status Using Operator Status Area The Operator Messages area shows all Operator Messages for the selected NetVault server. Most of these messages are various types of Warnings that require some operator intervention. For example, the above message indicates No suitable media found for Job 15. This may require the tape(s) to be changed in one or more devices controlled by the selected NetVault server.

159 CHAPTER 9 Disaster Recovery Disaster Recovery Backing Up the NetVault Database NetVault Database Recovery n Restoring Basic Operating System n Restoring NetVault Operation n Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup Restoring the NetVault Database Importing Media Unknown to NV Database Using the Data Copy Plugin n Target Audience n Installing the Data Copy Plugin n BackingUpDatawiththeDataCopyPlugin-152 n CopyingData-152 n Copying a Backup n Copying a Backup Set - 156

160

161 NetVault Administrator s Guide 149 Disaster Recovery Backing up and storing your data is crucial to recovering from a catastrophic event that destroys your data. There are two important components to easily restoring information: n The NetVault Database n Copying backed up data to an offsite location using the Data Copy plugin included in your NetVault installation. This chapter discusses how to use each of these features to ensure that you can access and recover data. The NetVault Database The NetVault database contains all details for the installation of the NetVault server. This includes information on configuration, keys, log, media and schedules. Because this information is important to keeping NetVault operations available, a backup of the NetVault database should be scheduled to run daily, preferably as the last job in the daily backup process. With a good NetVault database backup you can quickly restore NetVault to full operation, if necessary. Backing Up the NetVault Database The NetVault database can be backed up at any time as long as no other jobs are running. NOTE: It is strongly recommended that a NetVault database backup be scheduled to run on a daily basis and as the last job run in the daily backup schedule. To perform the backup, follow the steps found in Chapter 10, Backing Up Data (page 157). It is recommended that you use Target Media to direct the output of the backup to a specific item of media (MID or Media Identifier); if recovery becomes necessary the media can be easily and quickly found and restored. NetVault Database Recovery In the case of a critical event, typically a hard disk crash, the NetVault server and possibly the computer it is installed on, may become unusable. Depending on the configuration of the computer, you may need to perform some, or all, of the following steps: Restoring Basic Operating System 1. Replace the defective hard drive.

162 150 Chapter 9 Disaster Recovery 2. Re-install the operating system if it was stored on the defective drive. Restoring NetVault Operation 1. Re-install NetVault on the new hard disk, using the same path as the original installation. Do not add any NetVault clients, unless your main NetVault device is not connected to your NetVault server. If it is connected, then add the machine it is connected to as a NetVault client. 2. Remove all media from your normal NetVault device, except the item of media containing the most recent NetVault database backup. 3. Add the NetVault device as normal. See Adding NetVault Devices (page 77) for more information. 4. Restore the database backup using the steps in Chapter 11, Restoring Data (page 197). The installation should now be restored to the state it was in at the time the last database backup was performed. Restore any other data that was lost using the normal NetVault backup media. Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup If any backups were performed since the last NetVault database backup, the media containing the backups should be scanned to add the backups to the NetVault database and enable these items of media to be used for further backups. To scan for backups, select the slot or drive containing the media from the Devices tab of the Device Management or Restore windows, and choose Scan from the popup menu. Restoring the NetVault Database Restoring the NetVault database is normally performed as part of disaster recovery, and is usually a full database restore. It is possible to restore part of the NetVault database backup, but it is recommended that you do so only under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support (page 6). To restore the NetVault database, in its entirety, follow these steps: 1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbars, or by choosing the Administration Device Management command. 2. Make sure that the media containing the most recent NetVault database backup is in a drive or library slot. The media is display as FOREIGN, since it is currently unknown to the new NetVault database installation.

163 NetVault Administrator s Guide Select the drive or library slot, right-click and choose Scan from the pop-up menu. The media is scanned and details of the backups contained on it are added to the current NetVault database. The word FOREIGN is removed and the drive light should turn green. 4. Close the Device Management window. 5. Open the Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the command toolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore. 6. Select the client (or NetVault server) and choose Open from the pop-up menu, or double-click the client to display the databases within it. 7. Open the NetVault Databases item to display the backup savesets available for restore. 8. Select the most recent backup saveset, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu, or double-click the backup saveset. 9. Select all items in the backup saveset by clicking the square next to each item. 10. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box. 11. Submit the job by clicking the Submit button. The NetVault database restore will be run. Do not monitor the job while it is running, since this may interfere with the process. It is best to submit the job and then close all NetVault windows until the restore is complete. Importing Media Unknown to NV Database To import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previous installation of the current NetVault server), use the Scan utility found in the pop-up menu that appears when you select the media in the drive or library slot in the Device Management screen. For more information on using the Scan utility, see Scanning Drives and Media (page 94). Using the Data Copy Plugin The Data Copy plugin allows you to make copies of a previously completed backup and schedule copies to be made on a regular basis. Copies can be made of any one of the existing backup savesets or from a backup set.

164 152 Chapter 9 Disaster Recovery Target Audience No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the Data Copy plugin. Installing the Data Copy Plugin The Data Copy plugin is included and automatically installed when you install NetVault and no further installation activity is required. The Data Copy plugin is only available for a NetVault server. Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin Backups are performed using the standard steps for any backup job. For complete information on backing up data, see your NetVault Administrator s Guide. Even though the Data Copy plugin is installed, it is not used during normal backup functions. Copying Data The Data Copy plugin copies previously made backups. You can make copies in two ways: n From the Backups folder. You can select a single backup saveset from the Backups folder and create a copy. n From the Backup Sets folder: When you select a Backup Set to copy, NetVault always copies the most current data, unless the use last full backup option is selected. To perform a copy of a backup using the Data Copy plugin, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. You must select the server with the Data Copy plugin installed. Servers are always listed at the top of the data tree

165 NetVault Administrator s Guide 153 NOTE: It is important to note that two devices, or pieces of media, are required to copy data. 3. Double-click the Data Copy plugin to open and display the folders:

166 154 Chapter 9 Disaster Recovery 4. Double-click the Backups or Backup Sets folder to display the list of clients on the server with backups or backup sets available to be copied. 5. Double-click the desired client and continue to double-click to open each item until you reach the backups available to be copied. For instructions on copying a backup saveset, see Copying a Backup (page 155). Information on copying a backup set can be found in Copying a Backup Set (page 156). 6. Click the Backup Options tab to display the backup options, shown in the following figure: 7. Select the desired Data Copy Options as follows: n COPY TYPE - Copy a full backup to produce a new independent copy of the data: Copies the selected backup; producing a new image with its own index. n COPY TYPE - Duplicate a backup (duplicated incrementals will need their original full backup for restore): Duplicates the data. Both copies share the existing index. A new index is not created. n COPY TYPE - Use Saveset name from original backup: Loads and uses the Selection saveset from the original backup for the current data copy. This option is available for selection when the Copy a full backup to produce a new independent copy of the data option is selected. When the Duplicate a backup (duplicated incrementals will need their original full backup for restore) option is selected, this option is automatically activated. n COPY TYPE - Automatically get a set s last full backup: When selected, this option directs NetVault to retrieve the last full backup performed with the selected set.

167 NetVault Administrator s Guide 155 n COPY TYPE - Use a set s most recent job regardless of type: Repeats the last backup performed on the set, whether it was an incremental or full backup. n Migrate (Discard original backup): Makes a copy of the original backup then removes the original. This option is useful for disk staging and tape cleanups. n BACKUP LIFE - Use originals life: Applies the same backup life to the copy as was used for the original backup. n BACKUP LIFE - Use Backup Life on Advanced Options tab: Resets the backup life for the copy to the selection made in the Advanced Options tab. 8. Enter a title for the job in the Job Title box. 9. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar. See your NetVault Administrator s Guide for information on viewing the job status, progress and log. Copying a Backup The Backup folder lists the clients and all backups done on each, similar to the example shown in the following figure: 1. Select the desired backup saveset. 2. Select any other desired options and submit the job.

168 156 Chapter 9 Disaster Recovery Copying a Backup Set The Backup Sets folder lists the Backup Sets used to create backups, similar to that shown in the following figure: 1. Select the desired backup set. 2. Select any other options and submit the job NetVault locates the most current backup with this data in it and performs the copy.

169 CHAPTER 10 Backing Up Data Backing up Your Data The NetVault Backup Window n Backup Window Buttons n Window Tabs n Menu Commands n Using the Selections Tab n Using the Backup Options Tab n Using the Schedule Tab n Using the Target Tab n Advanced Options n Savesets Incremental Backup Procedure n Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule Restoring Incremental Backups Doing a Simple Backup Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin n Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin n How the Plugin Works n Consolidating Backups Using the Raw Device Plugin n Installing the Raw Device Plugin n Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT n Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX - 192

170

171 NetVault Administrator s Guide 159 BackingupYourData A NetVault backup is the name given to the transfer of data from the NetVault client to the backup device. The device's media stores the data, where it can be recovered by NetVault if needed. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as a NetVault client so that it may backup its own data. Most backups are very easy to create and submit. The NetVault Backup window provides access to a number of control functions, some of which are required only under special circumstances. Data can be backed up in a variety of ways, including: n A NetVault server can back up its data to itself as a NetVault client. n Data can be backed up to devices across a network. n Backed up data can be placed on more than one type of media. n Backups can be scheduled to run automatically. n Data can be backed up completely or incrementally. In this chapter you will learn how to perform a simple backup and what the advanced options are for more complex backup jobs. The NetVault Backup Window The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backup jobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server. The NetVault Backup window appears as shown in the following figure:

172 160 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data The NetVault Backup window contains the following options: Backup Window Buttons There are four buttons at the top of the NetVault Backup window that perform the following functions: NEW Click this button LOAD SAVE SUBMIT To do this: Clear current NetVault backup selections and control settings and create a new backup job. Remember that you can create and save a backup job without submitting it. Load an existing backup job, so this it may be modified, copied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and submitted. It is often easier to re-load a backup job by first finding it in the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selecting it and then choosing Edit/Modify. Save the current backup Job. Remember that you can access the saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab (see Using the Job Status Area (page 143)), as well as clicking the Load button to reload it. It is very important for good backup management that you save a backup job with a meaningful name as a Job Title. Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobs which are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window (see Using The Status Tab (page 242)) and the Job Status area of the NetVault Server Status window (see Using The Status Tab (page 242)). Window Tabs The following tabs appear on the window: n Selections: Used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriate NetVault plugin. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standard installation, while Application Plugin Modules (APM) are only available if installed separately. For more information on installing plugins, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). n Backup Options: The Backup Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified, depending on the NetVault plugin or APM in use in the Selections area. For example, a File System backup (e.g. NT or UNIX File System plugin) allows you to specify the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental, etc.). For NetVault APM s, the settings available may include login details (e.g. Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup. For a

173 NetVault Administrator s Guide 161 description of the more standard options, see UsingtheBackupOptionsTab (page 168). n Schedule: Used to specify when the job will run. Jobs can be scheduled to run immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command line or script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For full information on both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs (page 225). n Target: Used to specify what the selected data is backed up on (or to). You may Target a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for General Options. See Using the Target Tab (page 174) for more information. n Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only used for advanced functions, including setting Backup Life, Compression, Verification, Duplication, Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functions is detailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271). Menu Commands The Menu Bar in the NetVault Backup window provides access to the commands described in the following table: Menu Choose this command: To do this: File New Creates a new backup job. Load Opens the Load Backup Job dialog box where you can select a saved job that you want to run again. Save Saves the current backup job and assigns a job name. Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where you can select the desired printer and specify its properties. Close Close the Backup window. View Selections Open the Selections tab. Backup Options Open the Backup Options tab. Schedule Open the Schedule tab. Target Open the Target tab. Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab. Accept Submit Backup Starts the backup job.

174 162 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data Menu Choose this command: Help Current Topic Display a description of and help for the current focus item. Help Contents Display the Help Contents. Using the Selections Tab To do this: The Selections tab is used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriate NetVault plugin or APM. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standard installation, while APM s are only available if installed separately. For more information on NetVault plugins see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). The Selections tab of the NetVault Backup window appears as shown in the following figure: SelectingDatatobeBackedUp The exact method used to select the data to be backed up depends on the type of NetVault plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information on the online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailed here.

175 NetVault Administrator s Guide 163 Windows File System Plugin Data Selection Example The following example demonstrates how to select data for backup using a Windows NT File System Plugin. 1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client). 2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin). The About menu command displays information on the NetVault Plugin Version, and if applicable, the Licence details. The File Systems Help menu item opens the Help screen for the plugin loaded. The plugin opens to display all drives for the selected client. The following is an example of typical drives which may be displayed when using the NT File Systems plugin. Note you cannot select the Shared Drives for backup with this plugin.

176 164 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 3. Select the desired Drive, right-click and choose Open or double-click the drive, as shown in the following figure: When you want the drive to be included in the backup, click the square to its left to place a green check mark there. Information about the drive can be displayed by right-clicking and choosing the View Details command from the pop-up menu.

177 NetVault Administrator s Guide Select the Directory, right-click and choose Open or double-click it. When you want the directory to be included in the backup, click the square to its left to place a green check mark there. Information about the directory can be displayed by choosing the View Details command.

178 166 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data The restore tree for this example saveset has been expanded. Continue to open each level of the tree until the files you want to backup are displayed. You can selectafiletoberestoredbyclickingthesquaretoitsleft,sothatthegreen check mark is displayed. You can also View Details of the file. 5. Selectthedatatobebackedupbyclickingthesquaretotheleftofeachdesired item. In the following example, the complete drive is selected for backup: If you do not want to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click the square to its left again. The green check mark changes to a red X, indicating that it is excluded from the backup:

179 NetVault Administrator s Guide 167 Once the data has been selected, you should do the following: 1. Set the required Backup Options. See Using the Backup Options Tab (page 168). 2. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box. 3. Either click the Save button to save the backup, or the Submit button to start the backup job. A job can be created and submitted this way very quickly, and because no Schedule (or other) options have been set, the backup should run immediately using whatever media (not in a Media Group) is available. Windows 2000 Selection Options The File System plugin for Windows 2000 operating systems allows you to choose the System Settings directory, or any part of it, for backup. An expanded System Settings directory is shown in the following figure: The icons and files located in the System Settings directory appear only when that particular service is running and can include all or a portion of the following: n Registry

180 168 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data n Active Directory n Cluster Database n Certificate Server n COM + class registration database n Remote Storage Manager n Remote Storage Manager Database n IIS Metabase n Disk Quota Database Using the Backup Options Tab When available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections tab, the Backup Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified. The Backup Options tab for Windows NT is shown in the following example:

181 NetVault Administrator s Guide 169 The Backup Options tab for Windows 2000 is shown in the following example: General Backup Options The information available in the Backup Options tab is dependent on the type of plugin in use in the Selections area. This includes: n For a Windows NT or 2000 File System or UNIX File System plugin, the settings available include the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental, etc.) and whether you want to check for files being modified during backup. n For some plugins, the settings available may include login details (e.g. Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup. n For other plugins, there may be no backup options at all (e.g NetVault Databases plugins) The online Help System provides for specific Backup Options information for each NetVault plugin. See Using Help (page 5) for instructions on accessing the help files. Backup Type When present, the Backup Type frame normally has two options: n Full: When the selected Backup Type is Full, NetVault will perform a complete backup of all data selected. The only exceptions are certain types of data (often specific system files) which can never be backed up and will

182 170 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data produce warning messages in the Job Log if NetVault attempts to back them up. The Full backup type is always the default backup method, used when there are no Backup Options displayed or they have not been explicitly set n Incremental: When the selected Backup Type is Incremental, NetVaultwill backup only data that has altered since a previous backup was completed. There are two types of Incremental backup: Changed since last backup - This Incremental backup type will only backup data that has changed since the last backup, regardless of the type of backup previously executed. Changed since last FULL backup - This Incremental backup type will backup all data that has changed since the last Full backup. This may include data that has already been backed up by the Incremental backup type - Changed since last backup. WARNING: In order to perform an Incremental Backup, you MUST use a Selection Set set up for a job using the Full backup type. Please refer to Incremental Backup Procedure (page 179) for more information. NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVault Restore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored in a single Restore Job (regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See Restoring Incremental Backups (page 218). Miscellaneous Switches NetVault checks for files modified during a backup by reading the date and size of the file being backed up before and after the backup is performed. By default, files modified during the backup are not restored unless the Check for files being modified during backup option is turned on. The backed up file is placed in the backup index and is fully restorable. A modified file is displayed with a broken file folder icon in the restore window. The Windows 2000 plugin includes the option to Backup through Mount Points, which is a drive attached to an empty folder on an NTFS volume. Mounted drives function the same as any other drive, but are assigned a label or name instead of a drive letter. The mounted drive s name is resolved to a full file system path instead of just a drive letter. If this option is cleared, only the mount information is backed up, not the data on the mounted drive. NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then perform a restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location.

183 NetVault Administrator s Guide 171 Windows NT Filesystem Backup Options The NT Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type (page 169). The Ignore archive bit switch is available when Incremental Backup Type is selected. When selected, this switch causes incremental data to be backed up, regardless of the state of the archive bit. Windows 2000 Filesystem Backup Options The 2000 Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type (page 169). There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which include: n Backup through Mount Points: When selected, the data that is on a mounted drive is backed up. If this option is cleared and you back up a mounted drive, only the path information for the mounted drive is backed up.

184 172 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data The Account Details area requires the following information when backing up encrypted files: n Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be an account in the group which has the run as service privilege. n Password: The password for the Administrators username. Some important information about the Windows 2000 File System plugin: n Hard Links: When the first occurrence of a hard link is found, the data is backed up. For all other occurrences, only the link is backed up. This data can only be restored when the first occurrence exists; trying to restore subsequent occurrences without the presence of the first causes the job to fail. n Sparse files: A sparse file is a very large file created by application in such a way that only limited disk space is needed (i.e. NTFS allocates disk space only to the portions of a file that are written to). A backed up sparse file is restored sparse rather than taking up the physical disk space for its size. n NTFS-5 volume: A NetVault backup can be used to backup and restore NTFS volumes. If you have backed up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows 2000, it is recommended that you restore the data to an NTFS volume used in Windows 2000 to avoid losing data and some file and folder features. For example, permissions, encrypting file system (EFS) settings, disk quota information, mounted drive information, and Remote Storage information can be lost if you back up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows 2000 and then restore it to an NTFS or FAT volume used in Windows NT 4.0. Unix Filesystem Backup Options The UNIX Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type (page 169).

185 NetVault Administrator s Guide 173 There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which can be dynamically altered as necessary. A typical option provided here is: Backup through NFS mounts? - When selected, this switch causes any NFS mounts in the backup selection to be included in the backup. By default, this switch is cleared, as normally the mounted system would be backed up via a NetVault Client on that machine. Using the Schedule Tab The Schedule tab is used to set when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to run immediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or script command. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. For full information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup &RestoreJobs(page 225). The NetVault Backup window, Schedule tab, is shown in the following figure:

186 174 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data Using the Target Tab The Target tab is used to set what the selected data is backed up on (or to). You may target a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for General Options. The NetVault Backup window, Target tab, is shown in the following figure: The options available in the Target tab are: n Device Options n Media Options n General Options Target Device Options n Any Device: When selected, NetVault uses an advanced algorithm to back up using the most suitable device setup available for maximum efficiency. You may use Specify Device to restrict this action.

187 NetVault Administrator s Guide 175 n Specify Device: When selected, all devices available to the NetVault Server are displayed in the device area, as shown in the following figure: To clear the library or drive selection, click the square to its left. NetVault will use one of the selected devices (shown with a green check mark) to perform the backup. If you want to specify a target device using shared devices, see Shared Devices (page 63). Target Media Options n Any Not in a group: When selected (the default), NetVault will use an advanced algorithm to back up using the most suitable media available, which is not in a group, for maximum efficiency. If ALL of your currently available media has been allocated to a group using the Media Properties dialog box, the backup will halt with the message Waiting for Media, unless blank media is available.

188 176 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data n Any: When selected, NetVault will use an advanced algorithm to back up using the most suitable media available to give maximum efficiency. You may use other Media Options to restrict this action, as required. n MID: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the Media Label (Media Identifier) of the specific item of media you would like to back up to. NetVault will only use this media for the backup. n Group Label: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the Group Label of the media you would like to back up to. NetVault will only use the media belonging to this group for the backup. n Label Media - Automatically label blank media: When cleared, suitable labelled media must be available to NetVault or the backup will fail.

189 NetVault Administrator s Guide 177 When Label Media (Automatically label blank media) is selected, NetVault automatically labels and uses blank media, when no other suitable media is available for the job. n Reuse Media: You can specify how media may be reused for the backup by choosing one of the following options: Never: Select if you never want any media marked for reuse to be used for this backup. Any: Select if you would like any media marked for reuse to be used for this backup, if necessary. With same group label as target media: (Target Media By Group only). Select if you would like any media with the same Group Label, and marked for reuse, to be used for this backup, if necessary. Target - General Options The General Options allow a user to administer and protect the way media is used. The options available under General Options are: n Specify minimum space required on media before backup: Allows you to specify the minimum amount of space that a piece of media must have before it is used (in Megabytes). n Protect media from further writes after backup: This option can be used to stop any further backups from being placed on that media. n Ensures this backup is the first on the media: This option ensures that the backup is the first one on the media.

190 178 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data Advanced Options The Advanced Options tab provides options used only for advanced functions, including setting Backup Life, Compression, Verification, Duplication, Pre and Post Scripts. For more information, refer to Chapter 16 - Using Advanced Features (page 271) The Advanced Options tab appears as shown in the following figure: Savesets In the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can save the set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set of options. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individual tabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window. The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities on setsinthebackupwindow:

191 NetVault Administrator s Guide 179 Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263). Incremental Backup Procedure An Incremental backup job is always related to a previous backup job of the same selection. For File System backups, NetVault uses a Selection Set common to the Full and Incremental backup jobs as its method of relating the jobs to each other. Some software APM s do not use this method (e.g. Microsoft Exchange); please check the online help information. It is normal to schedule a weekly backup schedule comprising: n AseriesofFull backup jobs to run once a week (e.g. on a Friday night, Saturday or Sunday). n AseriesofIncremental backup jobs to run on other working days (e.g. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday) for each data selection for which there is a Full backup job. This minimizes the amount of data being backed up, shortens the time required for the backup window and reduces the media requirements. Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule To set up a typical weekly schedule of Full and Incremental backups for a File System plugin (NT or UNIX), use the following steps: 1. Create a new backup job in the NetVault Backup window for a Full backup 2. Select the data to be backed up in the Selections tabbed area (if doing a file system backup, this is normally a complete drive, or one or more directories). You may exclude certain files and/or directories in the selection, in the normal manner (shown with a red cross). It is recommended that you exclude the Recycled bin under NT and the /proc directory under UNIX, in addition to temp or tmp directories. 3. Save the Selection Set with a suitable name. 4. Set up any other required options on the other tabbed areas, ensuring that Full Backup Type is selected on the Backup Options tab (the default option), and that the Schedule tab is set as appropriate (e.g. Repeating every Friday at 23:00). 5. Enter a descriptive name for the job in the Job Title box; one that indicates what is being backed up and that it is a Full backup. 6. Submit the Job (but do not close the NetVault Backup window). 7. Change the Backup Type inthebackupoptionstabtoeitherincremental, Changed since last backup or Incremental, Changed since last FULL backup, as appropriate.

192 180 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 8. Change the Schedule as appropriate (e.g. to Repeating every Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday at 23:00). If required, you may change any other tabbed areas, as appropriate. 9. EditadescriptivejobnameintheJob Title box to replace the indication of Full backup type to the Incremental sub-type you have chosen (e.g. Inc_CSLBU, as an abbreviation for Incremental, Changed since last backup). 10. Submit the Job. The job will be saved under a new Job Number because the Job Title has been changed. You can use the Consolidate Backups plugin to combine Incremental Backups instead of doing periodic Full backups. For more information, see Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin (page 182). Restoring Incremental Backups NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVault Restorewindow,allowingALLdataintheselectiontorestoredbeinasinglerestorejob (regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See Restoring Incremental Backups (page 218) for more information. Doing a Simple Backup The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backup jobs for any NetVault client. The simplest form of backup (described here) is for the NetVault server to backup itself as a NetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be an identical name to the selected NetVault server.

193 NetVault Administrator s Guide 181 Note that no network is required for this type of backup as long as the device is locally connected. To use the File System plugin to do a new backup, the basic procedure is detailed below. Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have successfully added a device (as detailed in Setting up a Device (page 63) and have blank media (or media with a NetVault label and sufficient space left) inserted in the device. 1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the command toolbars, or by choosing Operations Backup. 2. In the Selections tab, open the client to be backed up. 3. Open the File System Plugin to display all drives and devices which may be backed up on the selected client. 4. Select the data to be backed up, drives, directories and files, as required. For this simple backup, you can ignore the Backup settings on the Backup Options, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs. 5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box. 6. Submit the backup by clicking the Submit button or by choosing Accept Submit Backup. This simple backup will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soon as possible, using whatever device and media are available). The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (or in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job and choosing the Monitor Job command to display the Monitor Job information.

194 182 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin The Consolidate File System Backups plugin is designed to eliminate the need to do Full backups. It produces a Full backup by using any number of incremental savesets back to the last Full backup performed. The resulting saveset is the same as a Full backup performed at the same time the last incremental was performed. No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin. Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin The Consolidate File System Backups plugin is included and automatically installed when you install NetVault and no further installation activity is required. How the Plugin Works Follow the steps in this example to understand how the Consolidate File System Backups plugin operates: Day of the Week Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Full Backup Incremental Incremental Incremental Incremental Operation Performed Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday s Incremental back to and including Monday s Full backup. Incremental Incremental Incremental Incremental Incremental Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday s Incremental back to and including the Full backup produced by the Consolidate performed on Saturday. Consolidating Backups NetVault consolidates File System backups using the incremental backups performed since the last full backup and creates a new full backup.

195 NetVault Administrator s Guide 183 To perform a consolidation of File System backups using the Consolidate File System Backups" Plugin, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

196 184 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 3. Double-click the Consolidate File System Backups plugin to open and display the Filesystem Backups folders: 4. Double-click each folder or file to open and display the backup savesets or backup sets that you want to consolidate. If you are consolidating with backups, proceed to the section Consolidating with Backups (page 185). To consolidate with Backup Sets go to Consolidating with Backup Sets (page 186). 5. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box. 6. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar. See your NetVault Administrator s Guide for information on viewing the job status, progress and log. NOTE: It is important to note that two devices are required to perform a consolidated filesystem backup.

197 NetVault Administrator s Guide 185 Consolidating with Backups A completely expanded Backup folder appears as shown in the following figure: The Filesystem Backups folder lists all incremental backups performed on the client using the File System plugin. When you choose one of the savesets, NetVault consolidates all previous incremental savesets back to the last full backup created, resulting in a Full backup from the selected incremental s date. All Full backups produced when selecting an individual incremental backup are archived and, therefore, will not affect the life of the last Full backup. To consolidate with a Backup: 1. Select the desired backup saveset. 2. Select any additional options and click Submit.

198 186 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data Consolidating with Backup Sets The Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used in backing up File System data, similar to that shown in the following figure: The Filesystem Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used to perform backups for the selected client. When you choose one of the Sets, NetVault finds the incremental savesets produced using that Selection Set back to the last Full backup created, and produces a new, Full backup. This new Full backup is not an archive and does affect the life of the last Full backup performed. To consolidate with a Backup Set: 1. Select the desired Backup Set. 2. Select any additional options and click Submit. Using the Raw Device Plugin The Raw Device plugin, included with your NetVault installation, is used to backup and restore physical disks and/or partitions. No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin. Installing the Raw Device Plugin The Raw Device plugin is included and automatically installed when you install NetVault and no further installation activity is required. If you remove this plugin and later wish to use it again, you must reinstall NetVault.

199 NetVault Administrator s Guide 187 Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT The Raw Device plugin for Windows NT provides the ability to back up and restore any physical disk or partition thereof. Partitions can be in any WinNT format (i.e., NTFS, HPFS or FAT). NT Raw Device Backups To perform a raw device backup in Windows NT, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. 3. Continue double-clicking each item until the desired disk/partition is displayed. 4. Select the items to be backed up. An example of Partition 2 (disk D) on Physical Disk 0 is shown in the following figure:

200 188 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 5. Click the Backup Options tab to display the Raw Device backup options shown in the following figure: Options available in the Backup Options tab include: n Backup Reported Disk Size: NetVault requests the size of the disk from the operating system and only backs up that amount of data. The advantage of this option is that a restore to another hard disk is possible if the reported sizes are the same, even if the actual sizes differ slightly. It is possible for applications to use the disk beyond the end of the reported size when using it for raw data. If this is the case, it is recommended that you use the Backup Entire Contents option. n Backup Entire Contents: With this option selected, NetVault backs up the whole disk, even if it must read past the end of the reported size. 6. Continue selecting any desired job options and click Submit to start the backup job. CAUTION: When backing up a raw partition, it is important to ensure that it is not in use. Backing up a partition in use may result in a corrupted backup.

201 NetVault Administrator s Guide 189 NT Raw Device Restores When restoring backed up data using the Raw Device plugin, note the following information: n If you are restoring a single drive (e.g., the C drive) then the target device must have a drive with same name. n The target disk for a restore must be at least the same size (or larger than) the data being restored. n A backed up master boot record can be restored to a different location without having to create the individual records or partitions. n You can relocate backed up data to a designated disk number and partition. You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and a partition number. n A master boot backup can be relocated to any disk number, but must be placed on that disk as the zero (0) partition. When you restoring an entire disk you only need to identify the disk number. To perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore buttononthe command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. 3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin to display the list of Savesets available for restore. 4. Continue double-clicking until the desired disk/partition is displayed.

202 190 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 5. Select the items to be restored. An example of the selection of Physical Disk 0, Partition 1 is shown in the following figure: To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps: 6. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the following figure:

203 NetVault Administrator s Guide 191 The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure: 7. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box. You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and a partition number. This can be in the format shown in the example (e.g., Disk1 Partition4) or as just the disk and partition numbers (e.g., 1 4). In each case the entries must be separated by a space. When the data being restored is relocated/renamed, the Restore Selections tab appears similar to the following example:

204 192 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data 8. Click the Target Client tab and select the client where the backed up data will be restored, as shown in the following figure: 9. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any other settings as desired. 10. Enter a Job Title in the edit box. 11. Click the Submit buttontostartthejob. Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX The Raw Device plugin for UNIX provides the ability to back up and restore character and block devices. UNIX Raw Device Backups To perform a Raw Device backup in UNIX, follow these steps: CAUTION: Always unmount the file system before you back it up using the Raw Device plugin. If the file system remains mounted, and is accessed before the backup completes, the backup may be corrupted. In this case the disk is marked dirty after a restore and you must perform a file system check.

205 NetVault Administrator s Guide Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. The NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. 3. Continue double-clicking each item in the tree to display the devices you want to backup, as shown in the following figure: 4. There are no Backup Options for the Raw Device plugin on UNIX. Continue selecting any desired job options in the Schedule, Target or Advanced Options tabs. 5. Enter a Job Title in the edit box. 6. Click Submit to start the backup job.

206 194 Chapter 10 Backing Up Data UNIX Raw Device Restores To perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps: 1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore buttononthe command toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command. The NetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab. 2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu or double-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. 3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin, and each item in its tree, to display the list of Savesets available for restore, as shown in the following figure: 4. Select the data you want to restore.

207 NetVault Administrator s Guide 195 To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps: 5. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the following figure: The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure: 6. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box. You must identify the target location by entering the full path to the new location. 7. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any other settings in the Target Client, Schedule or Advanced Options tabs as desired. 8. Enter a Job Title in the edit box. 9. Click the Submit buttontostartthejob.

208

209 CHAPTER 11 Restoring Data Restoring Data The NetVault Restore Window n Restore Window Buttons n Window Tabs n Menu Commands n Using the Selections Tab n Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection n Using the Restore Search Facility n Using Restore Filter Options n Using the Restore Options Tab n Using the Target Client Tab n Using the Schedule Tab n Using the Advanced Options Tab n Savesets Restoring Incremental Backups Doing a Simple Restore - 221

210

211 NetVault Administrator s Guide 199 Restoring Data A NetVault Restore is the name given for the transfer of data from the backup device (which holds the required data) to the NetVault client. The device's media stores the data, where it can be recovered from by NetVault. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as a NetVault client so that it may restore data to itself. The NetVault Restore Window The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restore jobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server. Most restores are easy to create and submit. The NetVault Restore window provides access to a number of control functions, some of which are required only under special circumstances. The NetVault Restore window appears as shown in the following figure: NOTE: With some optional NetVault plugins (particularly for certain databases) it is necessary to run NetVault restores entirely from the external software without using the NetVault Restore window.

212 200 Chapter 11 Restoring Data Restore Window Buttons There are four buttons at the top of the Restore window that perform the following functions: NEW Click this button LOAD SAVE SUBMIT To do this: Clear any current NetVault Restore selections and control settings and create a New Restore Job. Remember that you can create and save a restore job without submitting it. Load an existing restore job, so that it may be modified, copied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and submitted.itisofteneasiertore-loadarestorejobbyfirstfindingit in the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selecting it and then choosing Edit/Modify. For more information, see Using the Jobs Tab (page 245). Save the current restore job. Remember that you can access the saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab, as well as clicking the Load button to reload it. It is very important for good restore management that you save a restore job with a meaningful name as a Job Title. For more information, see Using the Jobs Tab (page 245). Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobs which are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window and the Job Status area of the NetVault Server Status window. For more information, see Using The Status Tab (page 242). Window Tabs The following tabs appear on the window: n Selections: Used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriate NetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of the standard installation, while APM s are only available if installed separately. For more information, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). n Restore Options: The Restore Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified, depending on the NetVault Plugin in use in the Selections tab. For a description of the more standard options, see UsingtheRestoreOptions Tab (page 212). n Target Client: Used to set which NetVault Client the data is to be restored to. You may Target any Client in the NetVault Domain of the selected NetVault

213 NetVault Administrator s Guide 201 Server. This option should only be used with caution, see Using the Target Client Tab (page 215) for more information. n Schedule: Used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to run immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command line or script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For full information for both Backup and Restore JOB scheduling, see Using the Schedule Tab (page 216). n Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only used for advanced functions, including setting Compression, Pre and Post Scripts. Menu Commands The Menu Bar in the NetVault Restore window provides access to the commands described in the following table: Menu Choose this command: To do this: File New Creates a new restore job. Load Opens the Load Restore Job dialog box where you can select a saved job that you want to run again. Save Saves the current restore job and assigns a job name. Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where you can select the desired printer and specify its properties. Close Close the Restore window. View Selections Open the Selections tab. Restore Options Open the Restore Options tab. Schedule Open the Schedule tab. Target Open the Target tab. Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab. Accept Submit Restore Starts the restore job. Help Current Topic Display a description of and help for the current focus item. Help Contents Display the Help Contents.

214 202 Chapter 11 Restoring Data Using the Selections Tab The Selections tab is used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriate NetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of the standard installation, while APM s are only available if installed separately. For more information, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). The Selections tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure: Selecting the Data to be Restored The exact method used to select the data to be restored depends on the type of NetVault Plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information on the online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailed here. Windows File System Plugin Data Selection Example The following example demonstrates data selection using the Plugin Selection Method for Windows NT and For information on other methods, refer to Setting Restore Selection Method (page 208). 1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client). 2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin).

215 NetVault Administrator s Guide Select the backup saveset containing the data to be restored, right-click and choose Open (or double-click it). If you are not sure if the saveset contains the data you are looking for, you can use the Search facility. For more information, see Using the Restore Search Facility (page 209). 4. Double-click the drive to open it. You can select the drive to be restored by clicking the square to its left. A selected item is indicated with a green check mark. 5. Double-click the directory, and each subsequent level until the data you want to restore is displayed. Select the directory to be restored by clicking the square to its left. The restore tree for this example saveset has now been fully expanded. The Search command allows you to search a particular saveset for a specific item

216 204 Chapter 11 Restoring Data backed up. This is useful when a large number of directories and files are present; it does not search the selected file! 6. Select the data to be restored by clicking the square to the left of each item. In the following figure, the complete drive backup is selected:

217 NetVault Administrator s Guide 205 If you do not wish to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click the square to the left of the item until the red X appears: Once the data has been selected, right-click and choose Rename on the highest level selected. See Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection (page 205). Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection After the data to be restored has been selected, you may be able to Rename (or Relocate) it by choosing the Rename command in the pop-up menu of the highest level selected in the Selections tree. NOTE: This function does not operate for ALL NetVault plugins, but is useful for a File System restore (e.g. NT or UNIX File System plugin). Here are some examples of Rename being used at different levels under the NT File System Plugin: Renaming a Drive for Restore 1. Select the drive, right-click and choose Rename.

218 206 Chapter 11 Restoring Data 2. Click the square and enter the designated drive for the backup to be restored to (e.g. F:\ or F:) in the Rename to box. In the special case of drives ONLY, Rename to and Relocate to have an identical function. WARNING: The drive specified must exist or the restore will fail. Renaming a Directory for Restore 1. Select the directory, right-click and choose Rename. The Restore Rename dialog box opens. To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the desired name for the restored backed up directory (e.g., _test9). WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail.

219 NetVault Administrator s Guide 207 To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path to the location where the backed up directory is to be restored (e.g. E:\temp). WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail. RenamingaFileforRestore 1. Select the file, right-click and choose Rename. The Restore Rename dialog box opens. To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the filename for the backed up file to be renamed when it is restored (e.g. new_simple.htm). WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail. To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path for the locationwherethebackedupfileistoberestored(e.g.e:\_test2). WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail.

220 208 Chapter 11 Restoring Data Setting Restore Selection Method You may change the Selection Method by selecting a different option from the list: The differences between Selection Methods is explained below: n Plugin Selection Method: This is the default method which works with any backup. n Backup Set Selection Method: Shows backups saved using a Backup Set. For more information, see Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263).

221 NetVault Administrator s Guide 209 n Job Selection Method: This method lists the backups by Job Title and works with any backup. Using the Restore Search Facility NetVault provides a Restore Search facility to quickly examine the NetVault Database and identify which backup saveset(s) data has been backed up in. With the Restore facility, you will find it easier to select the required data to restore. You can search for data in many ways. The Search String entry field supports both Basic and Regular Expressions search options. Example of Basic Search The following example shows a Basic search expression: This example shows a search for J?rgen*.doc. This search could be used to find all backed up document files for Jurgen or Jergen - the star (*) before the extension allows numbered files to be included in the search results, e.g: Jurgen.doc Jurgen_02.doc Jurgen_03.doc Jergen_04.doc

222 210 Chapter 11 Restoring Data etc. This example uses: n A star (*) character to represent any number of characters. n A question mark (?) character to represent any single character. This search will not find Juegen.doc because the specified search string asks for an r in the third position of the file name. Regular Expression Search With Regular Expression Search selected, you can enter a Regular Expression in the Search String. For more information, refer to Using Regular Expressions (page 315). Other Search Types n Search. If you select Search at the relevant Search Level to set the scope (or boundary) containing the backed up data you are looking for. n Client Level Search. If you select Search from a Client pop-up menu, ALL Savesets for the selected Client will be searched in all installed plugins. n Plugin Level Search. If you select Search from a Plugin pop-up menu, ALL Savesets for the selected Plugin (under the relevant client) will be searched. n Saveset Level Search. If you select Search from a Saveset pop-up menu, a single selected Saveset under the relevant client and plugin will be searched. You can also select Saveset Level Search from the pop-up menu of any selected drive, directory or file in the tree under the Saveset; only ONE Saveset is searched. Using Restore Filter Options The data displayed in the Restore Options tab can be filtered using the options under Filter Options. By default, no filtering is selected. Choose the type of Filter Options you require: n By Date Range n Show On-line Status

223 NetVault Administrator s Guide 211 or choose to Remove Filtering that has already been applied. Filter By Date Range 1. Select By Date Range and enter the required From and To dates. An example of all the data listed is shown in the following figure: 2. Click the Apply Filter button. Only the data whose dates fall inside the specified date range are displayed, as shown in the following figure:

224 212 Chapter 11 Restoring Data Show On-Line Status 1. Select the Show On-line Status check box. 2. Click the Apply Filter button. The backup saveset icon of On-line media is displayed with a green flash indicator as shown in the following figure: Using the Restore Options Tab When available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections area, the Restore Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified. For a File System restore (e.g. NT, 2000 or UNIX File System plugin), the settings available include whether or not to overwrite newer files, create backup files and restore files modified during backup and others. For some NetVault plugins, the settings available may include login details (e.g. Connect As, Password) to allow access to the client area that you wish to restore to.

225 NetVault Administrator s Guide 213 The following figure is an example of the Windows NT Backup Options: For information on the specific Restore Options available for data selected in the Selections area using a particular NetVault plugin, please refer to the online Plugin Help which is installed with the plugin. Some standard options are detailed on the next page. Types of Restore Options The standard restore options differ, depending on the operating system in use. Windows NT File System Plugin Restore Options are shown in the following figure: n By selecting Overwrite newer files, NetVault overwrites any files being restored of the same name, in the same path, on the target system (this is the default action). With Overwrite newer files cleared, no newer files will be overwritten.

226 214 Chapter 11 Restoring Data n By selecting Create backup files, NetVault renames the existing copies of any files being restored with a '.bak' extension, before the restored file is written. With Create backup files cleared, no backup files will be created. n By selecting Restore files modified during backup, NetVault restores a file modified during a backup. A broken file icon indicates that a file was modified during a backup. Windows 2000 File System plugin Restore Options include those in the Windows NT File System Options and many more, as shown in the following figure: NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then perform a restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location. Encrypted data remains encrypted after the restore is performed. The Account Details area information is required when restoring encrypted files: n Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be an account in the group which has the run as service privilege. n Password: The password for the Administrators username. The Registry Files area allows you to:

227 NetVault Administrator s Guide 215 n Update active registry: Enables the update of an active registry. To restore the active registry the system must be rebooted in Active Directory Restore Mode. n Restore to file: When this option is selected, data can be restored and/or renamed to a specified location. The Cluster Database area provides the options to: n Force cluster database restore: If another node in the cluster has a copy of the cluster database and the system thinks this is the best copy, it will overwrite the newly restored copy. Select this option to prevent the newly restored copy from being overwritten. n Use original cluster database location: Select this option only when you want to designate a new location for the restored data. n Cluster Quorum Drive Letter: When specifying a new location, enter the drive letter in the edit box. Two additional settings in the Restore Options tab for Windows 2000 are: n Apply changes made subsequent to Active Directory backup: Applies changes made to the System State data since the backup was performed. n Apply changes mad subsequent to Certificate Server backup: Applies changes made to the Certification Services log files made since the backup was performed. UNIX Filesystem Restore Options include those shown in the Windows NT Filesystem Options and include one additional option, shown in the following figure: n With Reset file datestamps cleared, files will be restored with a current datestamp. By selecting Reset file datestamps, all files will be restored with the datestamp they were backed up with. Using the Target Client Tab The Target Client tab is used to set which NetVault client the data is to be restored to. You may Target any Client in the NetVault domain of the selected NetVault server. This option should be used with caution.

228 216 Chapter 11 Restoring Data The Target Client tab appears as shown in the following figure: The top NetVault client is always the NetVault server itself, acting as a NetVault client. With no clients selected, all restores are targeted to the client selected in the Selections tab. To target a specific client, select the check box to its left - selection of all other clients will then be barred with a stop sign or be greyed out. Using the Schedule Tab The Schedule tab is used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to run immediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or script command. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. For full information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup &RestoreJobs(page 225).

229 NetVault Administrator s Guide 217 The Schedule tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure: Using the Advanced Options Tab The Advanced Options tab provides options only used for advanced functions, including setting Compression and Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functions is detailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

230 218 Chapter 11 Restoring Data The Advanced Options tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure: Savesets In the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can save the set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set of options. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individual tabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window. The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities on setsinthebackupwindow: Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263). Restoring Incremental Backups NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVault Restorewindow,allowingALLdataintheselectiontorestoredinasinglerestorejob, regardless of what saveset actually contains the data.

231 NetVault Administrator s Guide 219 The following example demonstrates how this concept works and included partial views of the NetVault Media Management and NetVault Restore windows. It might at first seem a little complex, but once you understand the principle and functionality provided, it should become clear how to select the required data for restore. 1. A directory was created, E:\test, containing a single file file1.bin, about 320 Kbytes. The directory was then backed up using a Selection Set and Full backup type (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46). The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a Segment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes: The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays the single file file1.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore: The file1.bin file is obviously part of the Full backup. 2. A new file file2.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test, so the directory now contains two files, a total of 640 Kbytes. The directory was thenbackedupwiththesameselection Set, but this time using a Incremental, Changed since last backup backup type (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47). The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a Segment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes (as only file file2.bin has changed):

232 220 Chapter 11 Restoring Data The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays BOTH files file1.bin and file2.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore. The file2.bin file is part of the first Incremental, Changed since last backup backup (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47). The file1.bin file is actually part of the Full backup (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46), but is also displayed under Saveset 47 so any file in the directory at the time of backup can be selected for restore. 3. A new file file3.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test, so the directory now contains three files, a total of 960 Kbytes. Files file1.bin and file2.bin where then both edited and re-saved so that they changed. The directory was then backed up using the same Selection Set and Incremental, Changed since last backup backup job (Job ID 25, this time stored as Saveset 48). The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays a Segment 1 Length of 960 Kbytes (as all files: file1.bin, file2.bin and file3.bin have changed):

233 NetVault Administrator s Guide 221 The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays ALL files file1.bin, file2.bin and file3.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore. This time all files file1.bin, file2.bin and file3.bin arepartofthe second Incremental, Changed since last backup backup (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 48). Again, any file in the directory at the time of backup can be selected for restore. Files can be selected for restore, as detailed in the Windows File System Plugin Data Selection Example (page 202). Doing a Simple Restore The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restore jobs for any NetVault client. The simplest form of restore (described here) is for the NetVault server to restore files to itself as a NetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be an identical name to the selected NetVault server (i.e. richard in this example).

234 222 Chapter 11 Restoring Data Note that no network is required for this type of restore as long as the device is locally connected. To use the File Systems plugin to do a new restore, the basic procedure is detailed below. Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have the same device configuration and media as used for the backup. This simple procedure will overwrite any newer data with the data stored on the media, so ensure that you are not overwriting anything that matters. 1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore buttononthe command toolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore. 2. In the Selections tab, open the client that was backed up. 3. Open the File Systems plugin to display all backup savesets and then open the backup saveset containing the data to be restored. 4. Select the data to be restored, drives, directories and files, as required. For this simple restore, you can ignore the Restore settings on the Restore Options, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs. 5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box. 6. Submit the restore by clicking the Submit button or by choosing Accept Submit Restore.

235 NetVault Administrator s Guide 223 This simple restore will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soon as possible). Note that the simple restore will use the default Restore Option of Overwrite newer files. The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (or in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job and choosing the Monitor Job command to open the Monitor Job information.

236

237 CHAPTER 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs Scheduling Jobs n Schedule Options n Using Schedule - Immediate n Using Schedule - Once n Using Schedule - Repeating n Using Schedule - Triggered - 237

238

239 NetVault Administrator s Guide 227 Scheduling Jobs You can set up your backup and restore jobs to run at various times. The Schedule tab of both the Backup and Restore windows provides access to the scheduling options. An example of the Schedule tab from the NetVault Backup window is shown in the following figure: The options on the window are: Schedule Options The Schedule tab on both the Backup and Restore windows have identical option buttons to select the main functions:

240 228 Chapter 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs The main schedule functions are: n Immediate: Runs the job only once and as soon as possible. When submitted, the job is immediately added to the job queue and runs as soon as the right device/media combination is available. n Once: Runs a single scheduled function only once. NOTE: Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled. n Repeating: Runs a function whenever the specified hour, day, week, or month occurs. NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeating until discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, and resume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window. n Triggered: Runs a job only when triggered by a special nvtrigger command. Using Schedule - Immediate When selecting the Immediate option, NetVault will execute, only once, the required NetVault function. If the resources (media, device, etc.) are available and no other job is running, the NetVault function will take place immediately. If there is a job running or a job scheduled that takes precedence, the job will join a queue until it is able to run. Using Schedule - Once The Once schedule option is used to execute a single scheduled function for the FIRST scheduled day or date specified. Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled. Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Options appearing on the Schedule tab for a single, non-recurring job are: Method Available options in the Method area are: n Any Day: A job scheduled to run Once, Any Day depends on the hour/minute entered in the Run at boxes the day/month/year entered in the From boxes, and.

241 NetVault Administrator s Guide 229 n Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will run the first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on the days selected in the Options list of days: When the Days of week is the selected method, you can specify the Days in Month as All or Selected. n Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month will run on the days selected: n Specified Date: A job scheduled to run on a specified date depends on the day/month/year entered in the Options date boxes:

242 230 Chapter 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs Examples of Using Once Scheduling n Example 1: Days of the week To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Saturdays during May 2000 From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000 ONLY): n Example 2: Days of the week To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 14 May 2000 ONLY).

243 NetVault Administrator s Guide 231 n Example 3: Days of the week To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Second and Last Saturdays during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000 ONLY). n Example 4: Days of the week To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 14 May 2000 ONLY).

244 232 Chapter 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs n Example 5: Days of Month To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998 the 10 in Options is selected (the 26 has also been selected to explain the effect this has): The From field displays a date of 27 Aug Because the first specified day of the month is 10, the job will be run in September rather than August. Only the first date number in Options (in this case 10) after the date number in the From field (in this case 27) is used; any other dates entered in Options (e.g. 26 in our example) are ignored. Using Schedule - Repeating The Repeating option is used to execute a repeating scheduled function for each scheduled hour, day, week, or month specified. NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeating until discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, and resume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window.

245 NetVault Administrator s Guide 233 Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Options appearing on the Schedule tab for a repeating job are: Method Available options in the Method area are: n Every Day: A job scheduled to repeat Every Day will run every day at the hour/minute specified in the Run at boxes and begin on the day/month/year specified in the From boxes. n Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will run the first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on the days selected in the Options list of days: When the Days of week is the selected Method, you can specify the Days in Month as All or Selected.

246 234 Chapter 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs n Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month will run on the days selected: n Every...:A job scheduled to run at a specified option, including every hour, day, week, and month: Examples of Using Repeating Scheduling n Example 1: Days of the week To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Saturdays during each month From 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 7, 14, 21, 28 November 1998, then on 5, 12, 19, 26 December 1998, then on 2, 9, 16, 23, 30 January 1999, etc.):

247 NetVault Administrator s Guide 235 n Example 2: Days of the week To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job will run on 10, 13, 15, 17, 20, 22, 24, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 3, 5, 7, 10, 12, 14, 17, 19, 21, 24, 26, 28, 31 January 1999, etc.). n Example 3: Days of the week To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Second and Last Saturdays during each month From 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 14, 28 November 1998, then on 12, 26 December 1998, then on 9, 30 January 1999, etc.).

248 236 Chapter 12 Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs n Example 4: Days of the week To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job will run on 15, 17, 20, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 17, 19, 21, 26, 28, 31 January 1999, etc.): n Example 5: Days of month To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 and 26 of each month, From 27 Aug 1998: Note that the From field has a date of 27 Aug Because the first day of the month selected is 10, the job runs first in September rather than August. If the From field had a date of 12 Aug 1998, the job would be run at 10:29 on the 26 August 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the 26 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 October 1998, etc.

249 NetVault Administrator s Guide 237 Using Schedule - Triggered The Triggered option is used to schedule the job to be started by the nvtrigger command in the NetVault6/util directory. The Trigger name is a character string, which may be up to the maximum length allowed by your system. NOTE: When a Triggered job is submitted, it is NOT added to the scheduled jobs, but only saved (same effect as using the Save button). You may view all of the triggered jobs in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window. See Using the Jobs Tab (page 245). For information on how to use the nvtrigger command to start a Triggered Job, please refer to Using Schedule - Triggered (page 237).

250

251 CHAPTER 13 Job Management Managing Jobs n Job Management Tabs n Using The Status Tab n UsingtheJobsTab-245 n Using the History Tab - 247

252

253 NetVault Administrator s Guide 241 Managing Jobs Each time you start a job, NetVault starts the Job Manager which oversees and coordinates the job. The Job Manager runs on the NetVault server, and monitors plugins and device managers on other machines, as necessary, to complete a task. The NetVault Jobs window displays information about all the jobs submitted by the selected NetVault Server: completed, running and scheduled. The NetVault Jobs window is shown in the following figure: Job Management Tabs Information available in each of the tabs in the Jobs Management window is described in the following table: Window Tab Status Jobs Provides Information about: Jobs controlled by the NetVault server. Running and scheduled jobs can also be controlled in this tab. All jobs created by the NetVault server. Jobs listed here are not necessarily active; jobs created and saved (but not submitted) in the Backup or Restore windows appear only in this area.

254 242 Chapter 13 Job Management Window Tab History Provides Information about: The chronological list of all jobs run and controlled by the NetVault server (on any NetVault client) Using The Status Tab The Status tab displays a list of all scheduled, running and recent jobs. Depending on the current job status, jobs can be viewed, monitored, edited or aborted in the Status tab. Job Status Identification Jobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status: Icon Cyan Blue Yellow White Dark Blue Indicates: Jobs scheduled, but not yet running. Jobs currently running. Jobs completed (not necessarily successfully). Selected Job (right mouse button for options). The colors can be changed in the NetVault Configurator, GUI tab. For more information about using the NetVault Configurator, see Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box (page 32). Log Entry Headings Each log entry contains information under the following headings: Heading Time Job Title Id Instance Description: Shows when the job was/is scheduled to run, at the time it was submitted. The name of the job as entered in the field in the NetVault Backup or NetVault Restore window when the job was submitted. The job identification number assigned to the job when it was first submitted. If the same job is submitted again, this number will be the same, but the Instance number will be incremented. A number representing the number of times that this particular job has been submitted. The first time a new job is submitted, the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc. (even if you have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in between submissions, provided you do not change the job title).

255 NetVault Administrator s Guide 243 Phase Status Heading Description: When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicate option is turned on, the duplicate job is allocated the same Job ID and Job Title as the backup job, but the Phase for the duplicate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can be identified). In all other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1. The current condition of the job (e.g. Scheduled, On Hold, Running, Backup Completed, etc.). For more information on the job, right-click it and choose the Monitor Job and/or View Log commands. Status Pop-up Menu Commands Commands in the Status tab vary, depending on the type of job: Scheduled, Running and Completed. Scheduled Job Commands Scheduled jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following figure: The commands available on the right-click popup menu are: Choose this command: Edit/View Job Delete Schedule To do this: Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window. This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. You may also double-click the log entry to perform the same function. Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deleted and continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary you can load the job into the appropriate backup or restore window and re-submit it later.

256 244 Chapter 13 Job Management Choose this command: Hold Run Now To do this: Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection, this menu item changes to Resume which may be selected to reactivate the job as scheduled. Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to the job queue to run it as soon as possible. Running Job Commands Running jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following figure: The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are: Choose this command: Monitor Job View Log Abort Job Edit/View Job To do this: Open the Job Monitor window for the selected job. This provides both Job Information and Data Transfer information as the job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry to perform the same function. View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries). Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialog box opens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user. Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job.

257 NetVault Administrator s Guide 245 Completed Job Commands Completed jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the following figure: The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are: Choose this command: View Log Edit/View Job Run Now To do this: View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries). Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to the job queue to run it as soon as possible. Using the Jobs Tab The Jobs tab displays a list of all jobs in the NetVault database. The jobs do not have to be currently active; for example, you can create a series of backup jobs in the NetVault Backup window, saving each job with a different name, without submitting them. When you want to submit the job, load it into the Backup window and click the Submit button.

258 246 Chapter 13 Job Management The Jobs tab appears as shown in the following figure: Jobs Pop-up Menu Commands Right-clicking on an entry opens a menu with the following options: Choose this command: View Log Delete Edit/View Job Run Now To do this: View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries). Delete the selected job on confirmation. The job will either be deleted, or a dialog box opens informing you that the Job is Active. Active jobs (i.e. jobs shown in the Status list as either scheduled or running) cannot be deleted. If you want to delete the job, Abort any instances of the running job first. Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window to allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a new job. Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job to the job queue to run it as soon as possible.

259 NetVault Administrator s Guide 247 Using the History Tab The History tab displays a list of all jobs which have been run. The Status column shows whether or not they have completed (Backup or Restore), or have been aborted by the user. The History tab is shown in the following figure: History Pop-up Menu Commands When you select an entry in the History log, right-click and choose View Log, the NetVault Logs window opens. Choose View>Set Filters to display the required level of information (e.g. All to show all log entries

260 248 Chapter 13 Job Management If you want to apply filters to the logs, choose View>Set Filters. When the Filter Options dialog box opens, select the options (e.g. All to show all log entries) that you want to apply, then click OK. Select All to show all log entries

261 CHAPTER 14 Using Logs Using Logs The Logs Window n Logs Window Buttons n Using the Logs Window n Viewing Extended Logs n More Info - Job Messages n More Info - Warnings n More Info - Errors n Filtering Logs n Using the Filter Options Dialog Box - 259

262

263 NetVault Administrator s Guide 251 Using Logs The NetVault server has a logging service that is used to centralize all the logs in a NetVault domain. This means that logs from the server and the clients are gathered into one central location. To ensure that logging can continue even when the system is low on disk space, the logging manager pre-allocates disk space. Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault server are displayed in the NetVault Logs window. A specific job can be easily identified, along with the processes that occur during it. Jobs can be viewed as they progress. The Logs Window The NetVault Logs window is opened by clicking the Logs button on the command toolbars, or by choosing the Operations Log command. The NetVault Logs window appears as shown in the following figure: Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot signifying its level of importance. Logs can be filtered to display the required level of detail (either higher or lower than the default view).

264 252 Chapter 14 Using Logs Logs Window Buttons There are two buttons at the top of the screen: Click this button: Set Filters Dump Log to File Using the Logs Window The display area shows the filtered logs in chronological order. For more information, see Filtering Logs (page 258). Command Menus The screen has menus for: To do this: Open the Filter Options dialog box (see Using the Filter Options Dialog Box (page 259)) where you can set the required level of detail to be displayed in the logs screen. Dump the logs to a file, in either ASCII text or binary format. The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logs window and re-examined at a later date (enabling all the filtering functions to be used); it can be used by NetVault Technical Support (page 6) should there be a problem that needs investigating. Menu Choose this command: To do this: File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box where you can select the desired printer and specify its properties. Print Open the Print dialog box where you can choose the desired printer and properties before printing. Close Close the window. View Set Filters Open the Filter Options dialog box to set the level of detail you want to display. Options Dump Log to File Save the current logs so they may be archived and then the active logs purged. Select Logs Source Select the logs source to be displayed in the NetVault Logs window.

265 NetVault Administrator s Guide 253 Purge Logs Purge (delete) logs back to a specified date from the system. Should only be used if the logs have been dumped to a binary file and archived for possible future reference. Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic. Help Contents Open the help system. The Logs Display Area The NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlled by the selected server. Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot, which signifies the message's level of importance: Display Dots Green Blue Purple Yellow Red Red Menu Choose this command: Description: To do this: Background logs provide background information about the NetVault System and NetVault functions. Information logs provide general details about a current or completed NetVault function, this includes details on Schedule, Media and the System. For example, the Information Logs inform you when a device is online and has media available. Job Message logs provide details about a current or completed NetVault job. These logs inform you that a job has started and completed. They also detail the procedures that have been carried out by the device and its media. Warning logs provide information about incidents that may interfere with a scheduled NetVault function, and could require some operator intervention. Error logs contain important information about problems that may have caused a NetVault function to fail. Severe Error logs contain the most serious information about critical problems that have lead a NetVault function to fail.

266 254 Chapter 14 Using Logs The log dots will sometimes contain an exclamation mark. By double-clicking the exclamation mark additional information is displayed in a dialog box. Double-click this dot: Purple Yellow Red When viewing the NetVault Logs window, you only want to see a specific type of log, unnecessary logs can be removed by clicking the Log Filter button. Viewing Extended Logs To display: A Transfer Information dialog box for the job. See More Info - Job Messages (page 255). A View Log Context dialog box for the warning. See More Info - Warnings (page 256). A View Log Context dialog box for the error will appear. See More Info - Errors (page 257). Extended log information is displayed in a dialog box when a dot with an exclamation mark is double-clicked, as illustrated in the following figures:

267 NetVault Administrator s Guide 255 More Info - Job Messages Double-click a Job Message with an exclamation mark for Transfer Information.

268 256 Chapter 14 Using Logs More Info - Warnings Double-click a Warning with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.

269 NetVault Administrator s Guide 257 More Info - Errors Double-click an Error Message with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.

270 258 Chapter 14 Using Logs Filtering Logs To see all of the log entries for a job: 1. Open the NetVault Logs window. 2. Click the Filter button to open the Filter Options dialog box.

271 NetVault Administrator s Guide Change Warning Levels to All, and click OK - all log entries are listed in the NetVault Logs window, shown in the following figure: Using the Filter Options Dialog Box The Filter Options dialog box provides different methods of filtering the logs in separate areas. The Filter Options dialog box appears as shown in the following figure:

272 260 Chapter 14 Using Logs TIP: The quickest way of viewing a log for a particular job is to right-click it in the NetVault Jobs window and choose View Log; that way the NetVault Logs window is already filtered to show information for the selected job only. For more information, see Using the Jobs Tab (page 245). The following information provides an overview of the filter options available: n From: Select either the First Event option button or the Specify Time option button for a particular date and time. n To: Select either the Last Event option button, or the Specify Time option button for a particular date and time. n Warning Levels: The Warning Levels determine the level of detail displayed with All for maximum detail, and Severe Errors Only for minimum detail. Job Messages is the default setting. n Classes: By default all Classes of log are selected. By clicking the title of a Class, the log messages belonging to that Class can be prevented from appearing. The same procedure applies if the logs are not selected and you wish to view them. Each Class contains specific log information, detailed in the table below: Class System Schedule Jobs Media Devices Database Data Plugins GUI Description Messages relating to the Operating System Messages relating to when the backup or restore occurs. Messages relating to information produced for a specific job. Messages relating to the media. Messages relating to the device(s). Messages relating to the NetVault database entries. Messages relating to the data plugin being used. Messages relating to the Graphical User Interface. n Clients: By default, NetVault selects all the NetVault clients referenced in the log files. All the log information for these clients is displayed in the NetVault Logs window. If you do not require logs about all the clients, unwanted client logs can be filtered out by clearing the specific Client box. If just one client is selected, only the logs relating to this client are available for viewing. If another client is selected, the logs of both these clients are displayed. This process continues until all the clients are selected; however, if

273 NetVault Administrator s Guide 261 no clients are selected, the log information relating to any clients will be visible. n Jobs: If the Filter On Job check box is selected, only the logs relating to the Job ID specified are displayed. If the Filter On Job check box is cleared, the logs for all jobs are shown, as moderated by other filter options. n Text: If the Filter on Text check box is selected, and a text string is entered in the field, only log entries containing that text (case insensitive) in the Log Messages field are displayed. If the Filter on Text check box is, the jobs containing any Log Message text will be shown, as moderated by other filter options.

274

275 CHAPTER 15 Using Policy (Set) Templates What are Policy (Set) Templates? Types of Policy Sets n Backup and Restore Job Sets n Backup Job Sets n Restore Job Sets n Standard Policy (Set) Operations n Saving a Set using the Save As button n Loading a Set using the Load button n Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box n Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) n Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) n Guidelines for using Schedule Sets Using Policy Management - 270

276

277 NetVault Administrator s Guide 265 What are Policy (Set) Templates? NetVault uses Policy (Set) facilities to save Templates for frequently used selections. A Policy (Set) is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job, that you save to be re-used later. A selection Set can be saved and re-used in many different backup or restore jobs, so that if the selection needs to be modified it can be done in one place and all jobs using the set will automatically be updated. The Set facilities are similar in action to a book style or template file used with a word processor or DTP application for book production; a style can be changed in one place and all the chapters of the book are automatically updated (rather than have to update each chapter individually). Types of Policy Sets The following sets are available: Backup and Restore Job Sets Set Schedule Set (date/time selection) Description: Save the date and time that the job is to run, and whether or not it is to be repeating. Backup Job Sets Set Backup Selection Set (data selection) Backup Target Set (device, media and general options) Backup Advanced Options Set (compression, pre & post script options) Description: Save a specific data selection. Save specific Backup Targets. Save specific Advanced Options settings.

278 266 Chapter 15 Using Policy (Set) Templates Restore Job Sets Set Restore Selection Set (data selection) Restore Advanced Options Set (compression, scripts selection) Description: Save a specific data selection. Save specific Advanced Options settings. Standard Policy (Set) Operations All Backup and Restore Sets use Standard Set (Policy) Control Functions. The following example shows the Schedule Set, common to both the Backup and Restore windows. The operations are the same for all policy sets. Set Controls and Functions Set Control Description: Displays the name of the currently loaded set (if any). You cannot type directly in this field. Loads a previously saved set. Savesthecurrentsettingsasanewset. Deletes the currently loaded set. This button is greyed when no set is loaded or when Modify is not selected. Allows the currently loaded set to be modified or copied. Once selected for modify, you cannot clear the modify selection; if you change your mind, load the set again to restore the original settings.

279 NetVault Administrator s Guide 267 Saving a Set using the Save As button 1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the NetVault Backup window), select the options required for the set and then click Save As. 2. Enter a meaningful name for the set, for instance Every 14th & last of Month, in the Save Schedule Set dialog box: 3. Click OK to save it, or Cancel to abort the operation.

280 268 Chapter 15 Using Policy (Set) Templates Loading a Set using the Load button 1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the NetVault Backup window), click Load. 2. Select the set you want to load (in this example, the Weekdays at 1900 set). 3. Click OK to load this set. Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box 1. With a set loaded (in this example, Weekdays at 1900), select the Modify check box. A Warning dialog box opens, displaying the following message: n Modify Selected: The loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at 1900) may now be modified and the Modify button is available. Change the selections as required. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job, or click the Save As button. n Copy Selected: The previously loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at 1900) has now been copied - NO SET IS CURRENTLY LOADED. Change the selections as required. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job and no set will be defined. Click Save As to save the selections under a new set name. n Cancel: To abort the loading of the set, click Cancel or close the message dialog box.

281 NetVault Administrator s Guide 269 Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) Deleting a set is made deliberately difficult to prevent accidental erasure. 1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the NetVault Backup window), click Load to load the set to delete. 2. Select the set you want to load for deletion (in this example, the Weekdays at 1900 set). The set will be loaded. 3. With the set loaded for deletion, select the Modify check box. The Delete button is now available. A Warning message appears, offering you the options to Modify the loaded set, Copy it, or Cancel the operation, which is the same as that of the Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box (page 268). n Click Modify to allow the set to be deleted. n Click Delete to delete the set upon confirmation: 4. Click Yes to delete the set, or No to cancel deletion. Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) This procedure is the same as Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) (page 269), unless you have already selected the Modify check box, and then clicked the Modify button.

282 270 Chapter 15 Using Policy (Set) Templates Guidelines for using Schedule Sets When a backup or restore is to be regularly performed using a specific Schedule (Immediate, Once, Repeating, Triggered), it is recommended that you save the selection set with a suitably descriptive name that is easy to recognize. This allows you to quickly re-load the selection for use in different backup or restore jobs. The following example shows the Load Schedule Set dialog box: Important information to remember: n The most important aspects of the schedule selection are named. n The schedule can be any combination of Immediate, Once, Repeating, Triggered. n It is not practical to identify all of the schedule selections made from the set name. If you are not sure if you have loaded the correct settings, check them carefully before submitting or saving the backup. n The wording At... on... has been used for a Once schedule. n The wording Every... has been used for a Repeating schedule. n The wording Triggered by... has been used for a Triggered schedule and where the trigger string is more than one word it has been put in double quotes ("..."). Using Policy Management Use the Policy Management window to control server selections, scheduling, and target device options for backup jobs. Although you can define and store policy sets for restore jobs, they are not as frequently accessed and therefore are not displayed in the Policy Management window. You ll notice that the Policy Management window is similar to the NetVault Backup and Restore windows. Open the Policy Management window by choosing the Administration Policy Management command in the main NetVault GUI.

283 CHAPTER 16 Using Advanced Features What are Advanced Features? Using the Advanced Options Tab n Backup Life (Backup only) n Compression (Backup and Restore) n Verify after Backup (Backup only) n Duplication (Backup only) n NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic Working with Firewalls - 288

284

285 NetVault Administrator s Guide 273 What are Advanced Features? Advanced options provide control over such features as the life of a backup, compression of files, data verification after backup, duplication and pre and post scripts. Both the NetVault Backup and NetVault Restore windows have an Advanced Options tab. This chapter describes the use of these facilities and the Trigger function on the Schedule tab. Using the Advanced Options Tab The Advanced Options tab on both the Backup and Restore windows appears as shown in the following figure: Options available on the Advanced Options tab are: n Backup Life n Compression n Verification n Duplication n Pre and Post Scripts

286 274 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features Backup Life (Backup only) The Backup Life frame provides control over exactly how long a backup will live. When you submit a backup, you have the option to give that backup a life other than the infinite default life. Options available under Backup Life appear as shown in the following figure: A backup life can be defined in the following ways: NOTE: You can use both of the backup options at the same time. The first to be satisfied causes the backup to be retired. n Backup - Discard after n Full Backups: This option allows you to specify the number of generations of backups you want to keep. A backup is defined by a Backup Set. Once the specified number of full backups for a given Backup Set has been exceeded, the oldest backups are discarded. See also Backup Life (Backup only) (page 274). n Backup - Discard after time: Allows you to specify how long to keep a backup before it is discarded. The duration of the media's usefulness is dependent on the specified time interval number for the selected Days, Weeks or Years option button. n Archive - This option is a stand-alone backup. Incremental backups can not be based on it and its life can only be set by time, not generations (number of full backups). Compression (Backup and Restore) Select the Network Compression check box when you want to reduce the bandwidth on a network when the files are transferred. When this option is selected, additional CPU time is required to compress the files. A single option under Compression appears as shown in the following figure:

287 NetVault Administrator s Guide 275 When Network Compression is selected, the following occurs: n Backup Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault client containing the backup selection before it is transmitted over the network, then decompressed on the client with the selected device attached. Note that when a backup is to a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connected to a different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to set Network Compression ON for a backup of any other NetVault machine (including the NetVault server itself). n Restore Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault client with the device attached before it is transmitted over the network, then decompressed on the client to which data is being restored. Note that when a restore is from a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connected to a different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to set Network Compression ON for a restore to any other NetVault machine (including the NetVault server itself). Verify after Backup (Backup only) Select the Verify after Backup check box to confirm that a backup has completed successfully. When a backup has completed, the data transfer is checked and a job message is created in the NetVault Job Log stating that the 'backup job has verified successfully'. With Verify after Backup selected, the job runs more slowly. TheVerificationframeisshowninthefollowingfigure: Duplication (Backup only) Select the Duplicate check box to copy a backup, either immediately after the backup has completed, or a later time. The duplication copies the backup from one piece of media to another. You must define Policy (Sets) for the Schedule and Target in order to use this feature. NOTE: The Data Copy plugin is another way to duplicate backups not associated with a backup job. See *** for more information on the Data Copy plugin.

288 276 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features Options under Duplication appears in the following figure: Once a backup is duplicated, NetVault treats the duplicate as another instance of the same data. The only difference between the duplicate and the original is that the duplicate can be given a different Backup Life from the original backup. When the Media Manager is given a restore request for data that has been duplicated, it will use the copy that is most convenient for the task. Options available under Duplication: n Migrate (Discard original backup) - With Migrate (Discard original backup) selected, as soon as the duplicate has been created, the original backup is discarded (i.e. future backups may overwrite it). This option is used when a backup is to be made to the most efficient device (e.g to a hard disk as a pseudo library, or a fast tape drive) to minimize the required 'backup window', the backup is then migrated to a different device (e.g. a slower tape library) in the background and the fast device freed for another operation. n Use Originals Life - With Use Originals Life selected, the duplicate is created with a Backup Life identical to that of for the original backup under Backup Life. n Discard after time - With Discard after time selected, the duplicate is created with the new Backup Life that you select in this area. The duration of the media's usefulness is dependent on the interval number entered in the field and the selected Days, Weeks or Years option button. n Using Schedule Set - To set the time for the duplicate, select the relevant schedule from the Using Schedule Set list.

289 NetVault Administrator s Guide 277 If a suitable schedule is not already in this list, click the Manage button to open the NetVault Schedule Management window, shown in the following figure, where you can create, modify or copy a Schedule Set. Select the desired schedule option button, and choose the appropriate settings. See Schedule Options (page 227) for more information. When you click OK, the schedule set shown as loaded in the screens Schedule Set field is displayed in the Duplication Schedule Set field. n Using Target Set: To set the target for the duplicate, select the relevant target from the Using Target Set list.

290 278 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features If a suitable target is not already in this list, click the Manage buttontoopenthe NetVault Target Management window, shown in the following figure, where you may create, modify or copy a Target Set. The window is identical to the Target tab in the Backup window. For more information, see Using the Target Tab (page 174). Click OK and the set shown as loaded in the screens Target Set field is displayed in the Duplication Target Set field. Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore) You can run a stored script prior to or after a backup or restore job. A Pre Script is run before the NetVault job. For example, a Pre Script could be used to close down a database prior to the start of a backup, insuring that no files are changing as the backup is carried out.

291 NetVault Administrator s Guide 279 A Post Script is run after the NetVault job. It could be used to re-start any processes closed down by the Pre Script. Using Scripts Scripts must be an executable file for the operating system in use (for example, under Microsoft Windows NT you may use filename.bat, filename.exe, filename.com, or if Perl is installed filename.pl). Please note the following important points: n All scripts must reside in the NetVault/scripts directory. If this directory does not already exist, you must create it and copy your scripts into it before attempting to use them with NetVault. n When entering the script name, the filename and the extension exists must be entered (for example myprescript.bat, startdb.exe). n Do not enter absolute paths in the script name fields. You can enter paths relative to the NetVault6/scripts directory, if you want to organize your scripts in subdirectories, (e.g. dbscripts/startdatabase.bat). n Be careful how you use the parameter field. Whatever is entered into the parameter field is passed to the script via the NV_USER_ARG Environmental Variable; this is a string up to the maximum length that your system will support. Do not enter quotation marks or escape characters in this field. n If using a script running under Microsoft Windows NT - Use nvexitstatus (in the NetVault\util directory) to provide the return value from the script. NetVault Environmental Variables The following environmental variables are available: n NV_HOME - The path to the root of the NetVault directory. n NV_JOBID - The numeric job identifier assigned to the job by NetVault. n NV_STATUS - The exit status of any previous phase of a job. This will either be SUCCEEDED or FAILED. For example, in a Post Script to a filesystem backup, NV_STATUS will have a value of SUCCEEDED if the backup succeeded or FAILED if it failed. If the script is run as the first phase of a job (i.e. as a Pre Script), then this variable has no value.

292 280 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features n NV_USER_ARG - Contains whatever value(s) were typed in the User Parameter field when the script was entered. This is a string up to the maximum length that your system will support. Example Scripts Please refer to: n Example Scripts under Windows NT (page 280). n Example Script under UNIX (page 284). NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic NetVault executes NetVault jobs, Pre and Post Scripts according to the following execution logic: Process Results Pre Script Success Success Success Fail NetVault Job Success Success Fail Not Run Post Script Success Fail Success Not Run Result Job completes normally Job Completes With Post Script Error Job fails but post script runs and reports error** ** Without a post script the job will fail with a message in the NetVault Jobs window, Status area such as Backup Failed or Failed to write segment. With a post script, using the correct exit status reporting, the job will be shown as Backup Failed. The post script is always run, if the job runs, so that processes stopped with a pre script can be re-started, even if the NetVault job fails. Example Scripts under Windows NT A Status batch file script to net report job completion status to another off rem status.bat rem Richard Benton rem Job Phase Status Report Call with Advanced Option, Post to net report job completion Name: status.bat User Parameter: Job fails with pre script error

293 NetVault Administrator s Guide 281 rem Standard Reporting (for all batch echo. echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME% echo. echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID% echo. echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG% echo. echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS% echo Previous Job Reporting (for if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - The backup succeeded! if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - The backup FAILED! Main Actions (Using net Edit next line for correct machine to Net report if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% completed" if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED" goto end rem Any other command batch file labels go here. :end echo End of Particular Batch File Actions rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE!!!! rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of Backup Failed rem when it is no good) cd %NV_HOME%\util if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0

294 282 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1 A Trigger batch file script to trigger each new job using the NV_USER_ARG as the Post Script parameter and net report job completion status to another off rem trigger.bat rem Richard Benton rem Standard NT Triggered Job Call with Advanced Option, Post to trigger the next job in Name: trigger.bat User Parameter: rem rem Notes: rem 1. Batch File must reside in NetVault6\scripts directory rem 2. If used for triggering remote jobs, script reside on both machines rem 3. Should work wherever NetVault6 is installed rem 4. Written for and tested on NT; with modifications, should work for UNIX. rem 5. Used successfully for daisy-chained job series. rem 6. Uses Net remote info box reporting to indicate progress of jobs rem 7. Must have NetVault6 services running on both machines rem if triggering remotely. rem 8. Set to end backup series submissions if any job fails (with error). rem Standard Reporting (for all batch echo. echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME% echo. echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID% echo. echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG% echo.

295 NetVault Administrator s Guide 283 echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS% echo Previous Job Reporting (for if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - Job %NV_JOBID% succeeded! if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED! Main if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED goto bypass Edit next line for correct machine to Net report if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% Completed OK, Triggered Job %NV_USER_ARG% being called..." rem The following cd command is necessary, as must be in NetVault6\util to run util commands. if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED cd %NV_HOME%\util if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo now in directory %NV_HOME%\util if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo (about to run nvtrigger job) Edit next 2 lines for correct NetVault Server if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvtrigger -server bentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG% if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo "Command was nvtrigger -server bentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG%" goto end Trigger Arguments rem Example NetVault User Arguments to be used with this batchfile rem (these are each used to backup a separate partition on Richard PC) rem (T for Triggered, rich for Richard PC, X for drive letter, _Xxx for label) rem rem TrichD_Apps rem TrichE_Games rem TrichF_Apps2 rem TrichG_Data rem TrichH_Web rem TrichI_Sue

296 284 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features rem TrichJ_Richard rem TrichL_Download rem :bypass echo (bypassing nvtrigger commands). rem Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED, ending series" :end echo End of Particular Batch File Actions rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE!!!! rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of Backup Failed rem when it is no good) cd %NV_HOME%\util if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0 if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1 Example Script under UNIX A simple script to check the NetVault Environmental Variables and job exit status. echo Check NetVault Environmental Variables Script echo 'The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = $NV_HOME echo 'The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = $NV_JOBID echo 'The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = $NV_USER_ARG echo 'Previous job phase succeeded (NV_STATUS) = $NV_STATUS # Return nonzero exit state if previous phase failed if [ "$NV_STATUS" = SUCCEEDED ] then

297 NetVault Administrator s Guide 285 else fi exit 0 exit 1 Triggering Jobs using nvtrigger NetVault provides the ability to create backup or restore jobs which are only added to the NetVault Server's schedule when they are triggered using the nvtrigger utility in the NetVault6/util directory. Triggered jobs are created using the Triggered option in the Schedule tab of either the NetVault Backup or Restore windows. For more information on using the Schedule tab, see Scheduling Jobs (page 227). You can run a triggered job on any NetVault Server listed with a blue (available) icon under the Available Servers in the NetVault Domain Management window. In most cases, this is the local NetVault Server, but can be any NetVault Server that can be seen under the GUI. It is not necessary to have the NetVault GUI running to use the nvtrigger command, even if the job to be triggered is on another machine; however, it is necessary to have the NetVault Process Manager service running. This service can be started and stopped from the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator. For more information, see Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31). nvtrigger Commands The usage (or command syntax) for nvtrigger is: nvtrigger [-server <servername>] <triggername> where: <triggername> is a string, which may be up to the maximum length allowed by your system, as entered in the Trigger name field of the Schedule tab on the NetVault Backup or Restore windows before the job was saved or submitted. and optionally (for triggering a job on remote server only): <servername> is the NetVault server name (as listed under Available Servers), on which the job is to be triggered.

298 286 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features Triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name) The following example shows a single word trigger: The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points: n The Trigger name entered (trigger_test1) is a single word; this enables the trigger command to be entered without the use of double quotes (" ") which are required when a trigger name contains spaces. n The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name. This makes it easy to identify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobs in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window. n The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use. When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. It will only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this example richard) when the nvtrigger command is issued: n Either for a job on the local NetVault server: nvtrigger trigger_test1 or for a job on a remote NetVault server (called richard): nvtrigger -server richard trigger_test1 n from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, you should receive the response:

299 NetVault Administrator s Guide 287 Activating trigger trigger_test1 If you then see the response: Failed to activate trigger this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a network problem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Server being triggered. If you see the response: Failed to communicate to NetVault services this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the local NetVault machine. To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to the remote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of Controlled Servers, by choosing the Administration Domain Management command and creating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI. Triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name) The following example shows a multiple word trigger:

300 288 Chapter 16 Using Advanced Features The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points: n The Trigger name entered (trigger test 3) is three words, so it will be necessary to use double quotes (" ") around the name when using the nvtrigger command. n The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name enclosed in quotes. This makes it easy to identify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobs in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window. n The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use. When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. It will only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this example test_srv2) when the nvtrigger command is issued: n Either for a job on the local NetVault Server: nvtrigger "trigger test 3" or for a job on a remote NetVault Server (called test_srv2): nvtrigger -server test_srv2 "trigger test 3" n from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, you should receive the response: Activating trigger trigger test 3 If you then see the response: Failed to activate trigger this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a network problem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Server being triggered. If you see the response: Failed to communicate to NetVault services this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the local NetVault machine. To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to the remote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of Controlled Servers, by choosing the Administration>Domain Management command and creating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI. Working with Firewalls NetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferred across a secured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port ID s in the Valid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVault Configurator. The port identification must be configured on the machines with attached devices.

301 APPENDIX A Performance Tuning What is Performance Tuning? Optimizing Drive Performance Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box n From a Selected Drive n From the Device Management Window n From the Library Configure Tab Using the Edit Drive Window n Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size Gathering Statistics n Viewing the Statistics Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled - 302

302

303 NetVault Administrator s Guide 291 What is Performance Tuning? NetVault is a high performance backup solution. After installation and the addition of devices, the majority of default configuration settings are automatically optimized, but settings can be manually changed to improve performance. Driver performance is optimized through the Edit Drive dialog box as shown: Optimizing Drive Performance Each Drive controlled by a NetVault server can be optimized individually, so if desired, different settings can be used for each drive in a library. Drive configuration can be optimized as the drive is being added (either as a Simple Drive or as part of a Library), or it can be optimized at a later time by choosing the Administration Device Management command. For general information, see Device and Library Management (page 59). Configuration aspects are detailed in this section.

304 292 Appendix A Performance Tuning Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box To optimize the drive performance, open the Edit Drive dialog box after opening the Device Management window using one of the following methods: From a Selected Drive 1. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Devices tab of the Device Management window. 2. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu as shown in the following figure: From the Device Management Window 1. Right-click and choose Add Standalone Drive.

305 NetVault Administrator s Guide 293 The Add Standalone Drive window opens, as shown in the following figure: NOTE: This method can only be used at the time a device is being added. 2. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Choose Drives list. 3. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu From the Library Configure Tab 1. Select the desired library, right-click and choose Modify from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure:

306 294 Appendix A Performance Tuning The Modify Library window opens. 2. Click the Configure tab. 3. Navigate to and select the desired drive. 4. Right-click and choose Configure. NOTE: This method may be used while the library is being added. Using the Edit Drive Window When you first open the Edit Drive window, the Configuration tab is displayed. WARNING: Do not change the default settings in the Configuration tab except under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support (page 6).

307 NetVault Administrator s Guide 295 The Configuration tab default settings are shown in the following figure: 1. Click the Performance tab. The default settings on this tab are shown in the following figure: The field Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) is what is often referred to a the shared memory setting. The shared memory is normally allocated in 32Kb blocks represented in the following figure, showing how it is shared between the two transfer functions.

308 296 Appendix A Performance Tuning Shared Memory 32K 32K 32K Hard Disk NetVault Plugin 32K 32K... Device Manager Tape Drive The default setting of 257Kb is actually 8 buffers of 32Kb (plus a byte). If your available memory allows, NetVault Limited recommends increasing this setting to optimize performance. It is also best to leave the Lock transfer buffer in memory check box cleared. Under Microsoft Windows NT, it is recommend that you change the setting to 8193Kb; under certain UNIX operating systems, the kernel memory available may be more restricted. 2. Increase the Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) toamore optimal value, as discussed. 3. Click the Statistics tab. The two check boxes on this tab allow performance statistics to be gathered and logged. Unless you need to gather statistics, leave both check boxes cleared. See Gathering Statistics (page 297). 4. Click the OK button.

309 NetVault Administrator s Guide 297 Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size The default values for block size and shared memory size are: Block Size 32 KB Share Memory Size 257 KB This relationship is based on the formula: (Block Size x 4) + 1 = Minimum Shared Memory Size This configuration is set up for each tape drive. If you don t satisfy this requirement, you may encounter problems with your system. For example, If you d like to increase the block size (e.g. from 32 KB to 96 KB), you must increase the shared memory size. n Bad Configuration 96 KB (Block Size) with 384 KB or less of shared memory n Good Configuration 96 KB (Block Size) with 385 KB or more of shared memory. NOTE: Configuring total shared memory size also depends on your operating system. Always use caution when setting block size and shared memory size on your system. Gathering Statistics NetVault provides the ability to gather statistics for each drive via the Statistics tab in the Edit Drive window. To gather statistics for a drive: 1. Open the Edit Drive window for the drive to be monitored using the instructions in Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box (page 292). 2. Click the Statistics tab.

310 298 Appendix A Performance Tuning 3. Select both check boxes and click the OK button. The statistics gathered are represented by the following figure: NetVault Plugin data channel Device Tape Data channel statistics - Data channel send statistics Device transfer statistics - Plugin data transfer statistics (Device side) Viewing the Statistics When either of the Gather Statistics options is selected and a NetVault backup is run, you can view the statistics by following these steps:

311 NetVault Administrator s Guide Choose the Operations Logs command to open the NetVault Logs window, shown in the following figure: 2. Click the Filter Options button on the window or choose the View Set Filters command to open the Filter Options dialog box. 3. Select the Warning Level - All option button and the extended logging will be shown as Background log items. Contact Technical Support (page 6) if you need help interpreting your statistics. The following example shows the statistics entries as Background, with green exclamation mark icons. Double-click an extended log icon to see the information gathered.

312 300 Appendix A Performance Tuning The Data channel statistics (Device side) show that the device was only blocked from receiving data from the data channel 5times, for a total time of just over 1 second. The Device transfer statistics show that the transfer was blocked on the device times (i.e.2344 times), for a total time of about 21/2 minutes). This shows that the device is the bottle neck in the chain.

313 NetVault Administrator s Guide 301 The Data channel send statistics show that the NetVault plugin was blocked from sending data to the data channel 1931 times, for a total time of nearly 2 1/4 minutes. The Transfer Information shows that the transfer took 2 mins 35 secs at a transfer rate of Kbytes/sec.

314 302 Appendix A Performance Tuning Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled When you use the Data Plugin (e.g. UNIX FS Plugin), it retrieves the data from disk, then streams it into shared memory buffers. The Data Plugin requests a shared memory buffer to send the data which it has received from disk. Once a shared memory buffer is assigned, the data is transferred and the data plugin gets more data from the disk, then requests another shared memory buffer, and so on. Next, data is transferred from Shared Memory to the Device Manager. This is a process level transfer of data so you would not expect blocking here. Once the data transfer is complete, the Device Manager transfers the data to the tape drive via the SCSI interface. The tape drive uses its own memory buffers. It is important to have the data being transferred at this point as fast as possible to keep the tape device streaming and therefore get optimum performance. The Data channel statistics and the Device transfer statistics dialog boxes show the data transfer statistics between the Shared Memory and the Device Manager. "Times requested buffer" shows the number of times the Device Manager requested data from the Shared Memory buffers. In the example you can see that it requested buffers 2350 times and was blocked 5 of those times. In other words, the data was only delayed being transferred to the drive 5 out of 2350 times. The total time taken by the blocks was 1151 milli-seconds. You can see that 2344 blocks of data were transferred and the total time waiting for the tape device (Blocked on device) was milliseconds (or around 2.5 minutes). This could indicate that the tape drive is at optimum performance but is not able to transfer to tape quickly enough to keep up with the stream of data. The Data channel statistics and the Transfer dialog boxes show the send statistics and transfer information. This represents the data transfer between the Data Plugin and the Shared Memory. In the example you can see that the majority of the buffer requests were blocked. This indicates that the data from the plugin could not get shared memory buffers frequently. This would indicate that the shared memory buffers are too small. The data is coming off the disk at a good rate, but the Shared Memory is not being emptied quickly enough by the Device Manager. This either means that the shared memory buffer sizes are too small or the tape device/scsi bus does not meet design specifications. If you see that the tape drive is having trouble keeping up with the data stream, you can assume that this is why there are so many blocks.

315 APPENDIX B Troubleshooting Getting Help Dumping Log Files Producing Trace Files Running the NetVault Configurator n NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT n NetVault for UNIX Help with Common Problems n Waiting for Media n Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log n Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration n TipsonBackingUpSybase-308 n Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape n Informix Configurations n Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI n Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems n Overheads in writing to tape n Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message n Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients n Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? - 314

316

317 NetVault Administrator s Guide 305 Getting Help BakBone Technical Support can provide you with the assistance you need if you are having problems with your NetVault software. For details, please refer to our web site: Technical Support may need copies of your (binary) log files and special debugging trace files to get the information they need to help you. This appendix contains instructions on how to get that information. Dumping Log Files The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logs window and re-examined at a later date (enabling all the filtering functions to be used); it can then be used by BakBone Technical Support should there be a problem that needs investigating. Binary log dumps are always the preferred format. Refer to Using Logs (page 249) for information on the NetVault Log window facilities. To dump binary log files, follow these steps: 1. From the NetVault GUI, click the Logs button to open the NetVault Log window. 2. Click the Filter Options button to open the Filter Options dialog box. 3. Set the Warning Level to All. This is important since only the content of the dump is moderated by any log filteringapplied(i.e.thedumpisthesameascanbeviewedinthenetvault Logs window). In general it is best to dump all of the contents - filtering can always be used to view only part of a log re-loaded into the window. 4. Click the Dump Log Information to File button or choose Options Dump Log to File to open the Dump Log Entries to File dialog box, with Binary Format selected as the default. 5. Enter a suitable filename (without an extension) in the Dump Log File Name box and click OK.

318 306 Appendix B Troubleshooting A NetVault - Information dialog box should confirm that the log dump has been written correctly: 6. Click the OK button to acknowledge it. The log should have been written in the NetVault6/logs/dumps/binary (or NetVault6\logs\dumps\binary) directory, with the specified filename. Producing Trace Files Debugging (producing trace files) should only be turned on under the direction of BakBone Technical Support. If you are requested to produce trace files, you need to: n Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging ON. SeeTurning on debugging (page 37). n Repeat the activity that was causing problems, so that full debugging trace files for it are produced. n Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging OFF. See Turning off debugging (page 37). n Upload the trace files to the BakBone ftp site. To reduce transfer time, we recommend that the complete trace sub-directory be zipped (or compressed) before being uploaded to the NetVault Limited ftp site (currently ftp We do not recommend that you send the trace files by , as they could overload Internet systems and fail to arrive. Contact Technical Support (page 6) for more information. Running the NetVault Configurator To run the NetVault Configurator: NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator. NetVault for UNIX Change to the NetVault6/bin directory and issue the command:./nvconfigurator

319 NetVault Administrator s Guide 307 Help with Common Problems Some of the most common problems you may encounter are explained in this section. Waiting for Media When a NetVault Job is running, it is normal for NetVault to have to wait for a period for the media to be made ready for writing or reading. During this period, the Status of the job in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window is shown as Waiting for Media. Under certain circumstances the job will remain in this condition, requiring operator intervention to resolve the problem. There are a number reasons why this might occur, including: n A backup job has been targeted to a particular device and/or item of media and either the device or media are offline, or otherwise unavailable. This is when the job is using option on the Target tab of the NetVault Backup window. n A required media for a restore job is currently offline. n There is no suitable device/media combination available to continue with the job. This may happen if you do not have media with sufficient space available to complete the backup. For example, the first part of the job may run and fill up a tape in a library, but there is no suitable tape to continue the next phase of the backup. n You have submitted a backup with the default Target Media option of Any not in a group, but all available tapes are allocated to groups so they will not be used (even if they contain no backups). n A problem has occurred with the device or media which become defective, as you are using them. Note that if media is found to be defective, it is normally marked Bad by NetVault and the media is not used for a backup. Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log The easiest way to see what is wrong is to view the Media Request information provided in the Device Management window. For more information, see The Media Requests Tab (page 72). If you think that the media in the drive may have a problem, select the drive, rightclick and choose Media Status to check its condition. You can also select the job in the Status area of the NetVault Jobs window, rightclick and choose View Log to see any error or warning messages. For more information, see Job Management (page 239).

320 308 Appendix B Troubleshooting Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration NetVault is configured to use 32k blocks of data and 257k of shared memory per drive. If you think of shared memory as many small buckets of memory where blocks of data are stored, then it follows that by using a 32k block size many blocks of data can be stored in 257k of shared memory. If the block size is increased to 128k, but the shared memory remains the same, then the largest number of blocks that can be stored in the shared memory is two, with very little space remaining. This limitation impacts performance, since you are no longer using memory for buffering data. As a rough guide to configuration of shared memory and block size's, use the following calculation to estimate the minimum amount of shared memory per drive: Block Size X 4 = Shared memory size. If your block size is set to 32k, then use this calculation: 32 X 4 = 128k which sets up the drives to use 128k shared memory. If your block size is 128k, then use this calculation. 128 X 4 = 512k which sets up the shared memory to use 512k shared memory. Remember that this calculation is the absolute minimum you would want to use. It is always better to add at least a few k on to of these amounts, so 128k would become 130k and 512k would become 520k TipsonBackingUpSybase The following information is valuable to prevent problems in backing up Sybase: 1. Install the Sybase plugin via the Client Management window, there will be an install software method off the pop-up menu from the selected client. 2. Copy the libsybhook.so file from the NetVault lib directory to the Sybase lib directory. 3. In the /etc/rc2.d/s99netvault6 file add the lines before NetVault is started SYBASE=<pathtosybaseXI> export SYBASE e.g. 'start') findnv6home SYBASE=<path to sybase XI> export SYBASE $NVHOME/bin/nvpmgr

321 NetVault Administrator s Guide 309 exit 0 4. In the NetVault configurator (nvconfigurator) go to the Plugin Options tab, then the Sybase options tab. Ensure the path to Sybase is correct, the default is /opt/ sybase/xi. Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape To retrieve files from a NetVault tape using CPIO (not NetVault), follow these steps: 1. Rewind the tape. Check in NetVault for the name of the device driver of the tape device you want to use. The device driver MUST be a non-rewinding device. IMPORTANT: Make sure you do NOT have NetVault, or any other process that uses the tape drive, running while you perform the commands; mt will fail because NetVault locks the device. Enter the following command: mt -f <device_name> rewind e.g. mt -f /dev/rmt/c1t0d0s0nn rewind When this is complete, move the tape to the correct position. 2. Position the tape at the correct point on the tape. To correctly position the tape, you need to understand how NetVault has structured a CPIO tape, shown in the following figure: NetVault Header Backup Job 1 Index Backup Job 2 Index Backup Job 3 Note: The lines between the files are filemarks on the tape. If you want to CPIO the first backup job from the tape then you will need to position the tape past the NetVault Header to the first filemark that denotes the beginning of the first backup job, using these steps: Issue the following command: mt -f <device_name> fsf X where X denotes the number of file marks you want to move to. e.g., to move to the start of Backup Job 2, the command would be mt -f <device_name> fsf 3 Important: Only use NON-REWINDING device drivers. If you use a rewinding device driver, after each time the tape is repositioned it will rewind. No matter

322 310 Appendix B Troubleshooting how many file marks you move you will always end up at the beginning of the tape. 3. Use CPIO to un-archive the files onto your hard disk. Issue the following command to un-archive the data from the tape onto your hard disk into the original directory the files were backed up from: cpio -icvdumb <device_name> For example, if the files were backup up from /home/elliott, then the files will be restored to /home/elliott even if you ran CPIO from /usr. Make sure you have enough disk space to complete this activity. If you want to view the archive before you un-archive onto your hard disk, issue the following command: cpio -tab <device_name> This will list the archive as if you listed a directory contents with the ls -I command. To move the archive from tape onto your hard disk before un-archiving, issue the following command: dd if=<device_name> of=/<location to place file/name of the file> bs=xxk where xxk is the device block size. e.g., dd if=/dev/rmt/c120t5d0s0nn of=/home/elliott/ file.cpio bs=32k If you check the directory into which the file was copied. Now you need to un-archive the file by issuing the following command: cpio -icvdumb </location of cpio file> e.g., cpio -icvdumb </home/elliott/file.cpio Again, this will un-archive the files into their original directory. There is no function within CPIO that allows files to be redirected into an alternate directory. FOR SUN SOLARIS ONLY The command shown below will not work on Sun Solaris machines: cpio -icvdumb <device_name> To cpio directly from tape, use the following command: dd if=<non rewinding tape> bs=xxk cpio -icvdumb where xx is the block size of the device.

323 NetVault Administrator s Guide 311 Informix Configurations In the Informix onconfig file, there are 2 settings that may cause problems if not correctly configured: TAPEDEV /dev/null # Tape device path LTAPEDEV /dev/null # Log tape device path If these are set to /dev/null then this could cause Informix problems. Change the /dev/null to NetVault, and this problem is resolved. Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI If, when browsing a client, there are missing icons, you may need to refresh the cached pits, using these steps: 1. Stop the GUI on both the server and the client. 2. Navigate to the /nv6/gui/cachedpits directory. 3. Remove the directory that has the same name as the client with the missing icons. 4. Move into the /cachedpits/icons directory 5. Remove ALL icons. 6. Restart the GUI on the client. 7. Browse the client, and all icons will be copied from the server to the client. This may take a few seconds. Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems NetVault6 allows you to define which NIC you want NetVault6 to use. This can be useful if you are having problems with communications between a NetVault6 server and a NetVault6 client. To specify which NIC you want to use, follow these steps: 1. Start the NetVault configurator on the machine with the multiple NIC's and click the Network Manager tab. 2. To specify a NIC, enter the IP address the NIC is using into the preferred network address and NetVault will only use that NIC to broadcast on. If there are NIC's that are may be connected to the internet or to parts of the network you do not want NetVault to broadcast on, then enter the IP addresses of the NIC's you want to bar. If there are multiple addressees, then enter the addresses separated by a comma (,) for example, ,

324 312 Appendix B Troubleshooting In a environment that has more than 2 networks, this can be used to prefer some networks over others, as described in the following example: Asitehas3networks: Network A is the working network. Network B is a the backup network Network C is a private network that should not be used for backups at all. Most machines are connected to network A, but some are only connected to Network B. No machines are only connected to network C. A few machines are connected to both network A & B In this case, we can set up Network B as the preferred network, and network C as a barred network. This will have the following effect: Machines that are connected to both A & B will use B. Machines that are connected to A only will be able to backup as network A is not barred. Machines that are connected to B will only backup over network B, completely ignoring network A. This means that only machines that have to be backed up over Network A will, all other machines if possible will backup over Network B. This reduces traffic on the working network, and ensures that you will get the best usage out of your backup network. Overheads in writing to tape When backing up to tape, there is an overhead that makes the backup appear to backup a larger amount of data than is reported by the OS. Theoverheadsforwritingtotapeare: n CPIO (Unix) 110 byte overhead per file n MTF (Windows NT) Minimum of 2K overhead per file Data stored on tape will ALWAYS be bigger than that on disk. This is because there is an overhead with tape formats for storing data. This means that if you are doing lots of small files - less that 1k, your backups will easily be twice as big. If you have 1000 empty files they will actually require 2Mb of tape space when using MTF. Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message If an Oracle backup fails with an error Can't open XXX file or directory, itmay indicate a permissions problem.

325 NetVault Administrator s Guide 313 The following directories both need read/write access rights to both the netvault/root user and the to oracle user: /netvault6/config /netvault6/tmp During the backup, NetVault SU's from root to oracle user. Problems can occur if the oracle user cannot write into either of the above directories. Usually the process manager on a restart will set the correct write accesses to both the netvault and oracle user, but there have been times when this does not work under certain circumstances. The resolution in this case is to chmod the above directories to 777. This will allow ALL users read and write access. Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients If you find you can see network clients, but are getting error messages relating to not being able to communicate with them, you must: 1. Establish whether you actually have a link between the 2 machines by pinging each way (from client to server and from server to client). Always use network names. If the ping fails with the network name, but works with an IP address, then almost certainly you have not setup either DNS or hosts. Either can be responsible for name resolution. 2. Running nslookup can also help in trying to understand why you are unable to connect to a machine. Running nslookup on a machine will not only show the network name and IP address of the machine you specified, but it will also tell you the DNS server that the machine is resolving against. Use the following commands to determine whether DNS is correctly configured; From the NetVault server: nslookup <clients network name including domain name> -> Make sure the correct IP is returned nslookup <clients IP address> -> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned From the NetVault Client: nslookup <servers network name including domain name> -> Make sure the correct IP is returned nslookup <servers IP address> -> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned

326 314 Appendix B Troubleshooting Once you have ascertained that you are able to ping with the network name, check to see if you can communicate with the client. 3. If the reverse DNS is incorrect (i.e., nslookup <ip address> is returning nothing or the wrong name), then add the server and clients name and IP address to the hosts files on both the server and client. Most machines are set up to try name resolution from hosts files first, then DNS. If this is the case, adding names and IPs into the hosts file should override the DNS problem. However, this is not a permanent fix and efforts to resolve the DNS problems should be made. This is particularly so if you are using DHCP. This will achieve 2 things. n First, it will allow you to be able to back up your client. n Second, it will prove that there is a problem with the name resolving of your DNS server. You will find the hosts file is the following places: Windows NT: C:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts Unix: /etc/hosts The layout of the hosts file is: <IP Address><space or tab><name> for example: elliott You can also have multiple network names (or aliases) in hosts. These will be separated by a space. Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? The /proc directory is a dynamic structure created so that the operating system memory space can be accessed through the filesystem. It is almost completely read only and restoring it cannot be done. It is not the original image for the kernel on disk but the memory version of it.

327 APPENDIX C Using Regular Expressions What is a Regular Expression? Where are Regular Expressions Used? Using Regular Expressions - 317

328

329 NetVault Administrator s Guide 317 What is a Regular Expression? A regular expression is a shorthand for abbreviating patterns of text. Where are Regular Expressions Used? Regular expressions can be used in the Restore Search dialog box when looking for specific backup savesets in the Selections frame of the NetVault Restore window. To open the Restore Search dialog box, select a backup saveset (or any data elements below it), right-click and choose Search from the pop-up menu. The Restore Search dialog box appears as shown in the following figure: Select the Regular Expression Search check box to search for all backups satisfying the regular expression pattern entered as a Search String. The use of these expressions is beyond the scope of this manual but this Appendix provides some information from a Public Domain source which may be of use. NOTE: BakBone Software assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of this information. Using Regular Expressions The following is adapted from the manual for GNU grep (a general regular expression parser), the data extractor search engine uses egrep to perform free-text searches. A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller expressions Grep understands two different versions of regular expression syntax: `basic' and `extended.' In GNU grep, there is no difference in available functionality using either syntax. In other implementations, basic regular expressions are less powerful. The following description applies to extended regular expressions; differences for basic regular expressions are summarized afterwards. The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character. Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match

330 318 Appendix C Using Regular Expressions themselves. Digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any meta-character with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash. A list of characters enclosed by [ and ] matches any single character in that list; if the first character of the list is the caret ^ then it matches any character not in the list. For example, the regular expression [ ] matches any single digit. A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters, separated by a hyphen. The above expression can therefore be concisely expressed as [0-9]. Finally, certain named classes of characters are predefined. Their names are self explanatory, and they are [:alnum:], [:alpha:], [:cntrl:], [:digit:], [:graph:], [:lower:], [:print:], [:punct:], [:space:], [:upper:], and [:xdigit:]. For example, [[:alnum:]] means [0-9A-Za-z], except the latter form is dependent upon the ASCII character encoding, whereas the former is portable. (Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, and must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list.) Most metacharacters lose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal ] place it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal ^ place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal - place it last. The period. matches any single character. The symbol \w is a synonym for [[:alnum:]] and \W is a synonym for [^[:alnum]]. The caret ^ and the dollar sign $ are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a line. The symbols \< and \> respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a word. The symbol \b matches the empty string at the edge of a word, and \B matches the empty string provided it's not at the edge of a word. A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of several repetition operators:? The preceding item is optional and matched at most once. * The preceding item will be matched zero or more times. + The preceding item will be matched one or more times. {n} The preceding item is matched exactly n times. {n,} The preceding item is matched n or more times. {,m} The preceding item is optional and is matched at most m times. {n,m} The preceding item is matched at least n times, but not more than m times. Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated subexpressions. Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator ; the resulting regular expression matches any string matching either subexpression. Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules.

331 NetVault Administrator s Guide 319 The backreference \n, where n is a single digit, matches the substring previously matched by the nth parenthesized subexpression of the regular expression. In basic regular expressions the metacharacters?, +, {,, (, and ) lose their special meaning; instead use the backslashed versions \?, \+, \{, \, \(, and \). In egrep the metacharacter { loses its special meaning; instead use \{.

332

333 APPENDIX D Hardware and Software Support Platform and Operating System Support Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver n Installation from Image File n Copying the Software from the CD-ROM n Installing the Software from Image n Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver n Post-Installation n Specifying Media Changer to RS n NetVault Utilities - 327

334

335 NetVault Administrator s Guide 323 Platform and Operating System Support NetVault Platform/OS Support NetVault Servers Windows NT (Intel) NetVault Clients Windows NT (Intel) NCR (MP-RAS r03) NCR (MP-RAS r03) SUN Solaris (SunSparc) SUN Solaris (Intel) Irix (Silicon Graphics) Digital UNIX (Alpha) Linux HP-UX (HP9000/700) AIX (IBM RS/6000) SUN Solaris (SunSparc) SUN Solaris (Intel) Irix (Silicon Graphics) Digital UNIX (Alpha) Linux HP-UX (HP9000/700) AIX (IBM RS/6000) Windows 95/98 2 Windows 3.1x 2 OS/2 (IBM) 2 Novell NetWare 3 & 4 2 NOTE: For the most up-to-date information on platform and operating systems supported by NetVault, go to the web site at 2 File System backup and restore using Office Data Share plugin Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver Installation from Image File To install the software you must: n Copy the NetVault SCSI driver software from the distribution media to the computer.

336 324 Appendix D Hardware and Software Support n Run an interactive program that automates the installation procedure. Copying the Software from the CD-ROM You first of all copy the NetVault SCSI driver installation software from the Distribution CD-ROM to your NetVault Server as follows: 1. Log on to the computer as root. 2. Insert the distribution CD-ROM into a drive on the computer, or one shared on the network. 3. Using your standard binary file copy/transfer procedures, copy the image file from the root of the CD-ROM, to the /tmp directory on the computer. You should ensure that the filename image is in lower case once transferred. Installing the Software from Image You install the NetVault SCSI Drivers as follows: 1. Log on to the computer as root. 2. Run the IBM smit utility, and select the following options from the menus presented: Software Installation and Maintenance Install and Update Software Install/Update Selectable Software (Custom Install) Install/Update From All Available Software The Install/Update From All Available Software window is displayed: 3. Enter the INPUT device /directory for software, i.e.manually type in the path: /tmp/image 4. Click OK.

337 NetVault Administrator s Guide 325 Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver The window changes as shown in the following figure: ] 5. Click List alongside the SOFTWARE to install line. The Multi-select List window is displayed:

338 326 Appendix D Hardware and Software Support 6. Select the NetVault Scsi Media Changer Driver and click OK (twice) on this screen and the previous screen. Youwillbeasked Areyousure?. 7. Click OK. The Netvault SCSI drivers will now install. Please wait. At the end of the installation the Install/Update From All Available Software window will show the installation output:

339 NetVault Administrator s Guide 327 The key part of the window show read: 8. Choose Done. Your NetVault SCSI driver software is now installed in the /usr/lpp/netvault directory. 9. Exit smit and continue with the Post Installation procedure. Post-Installation After installing the software, it is necessary to configure the media changer of an attached library onto your system: Specifying Media Changer to RS6000 To specify a Media Changer to the system you enter the following command: /usr/lpp/netvault/addchm This automatically configures the media changer on the system, e.g. Scanning SCSI busses for unknown chm devices Found "OVERLAND" "LXB" on scsi1 at Connection Address [3,0] Adding LXB as a generic CHM device mkdev -c chm -s scsi -t generic -p scsi1 -w 3,0 wa0 Available Thedeviceintheexamplewasaddedas/dev/wa0. NetVault Utilities The /usr/lpp/netvault directory contains a number of files which should not be manually removed. The two executables which you may run are: /usr/lpp/netvault/addchm This automatically configures the media changer on the system (see previous heading) and /usr/lpp/netvault/remove_chm_devices

340 328 Appendix D Hardware and Software Support Use this to remove wa devices before uninstalling the NetVault SCSI drivers using smit.

341 APPENDIX E Creating Virtual Libraries Creating Virtual Libraries n GettingSetUptoCreateaVirtualLibrary-331 n Generating Disk Devices - 332

342

343 NetVault Administrator s Guide 331 Creating Virtual Libraries Inordertoplacebackedupdataonaharddrive,youmustconfigureNetVaultwitha directory structure incorporating files that represent the media to be created. The Automatic Disk Device Generator makes creating virtual libraries a simple process. You may want to set up this type of configuration for evaluation, disk staging or just backing up to a hard disk. Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library Your NetVault installation CD includes a package that allows you to automatically generate disk devices in a virtual library. To install the package on your machine: 1. Open the Client Management window by clicking the Client Management button on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Client Management command. 2. Right -click the desired client and choose Install Software, asshowninthe following figure: 3. Navigate to the directory where your NetVault software was installed and find the packages/extra-npks/ddv110g.npk file.

344 332 Appendix E Creating Virtual Libraries 4. Double-click the file. The software is loaded and the following message appears: 5. Click OK to exit the dialog box. Now you are ready to generate your disk devices. Generating Disk Devices Follow these steps to generate disk devices on your hard drive: 1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Management button on the command toolbar or by choosing the Administration Device Management command. 2. Right-click the desired device and choose Add Library to open the Add Library window, shown in the following example:

345 NetVault Administrator s Guide Right-click the client in the Choose Library area and choose Create Pseudo Library to open the Add new pseudo library dialog box, shown in the following figure: 4. Enter the following information: n Library location: Thepathtothelocationofthelibrary. n Library name: The name of the library you want to create. n Barcode prefix: The prefix for the barcodes you want to assign. NetVault generates a random code to help maintain the uniqueness of bar codes. n Number of drives: Select the number of drives you want to create. n Number of slots: Assign the number of slots in the library. n Mediacapacity(MB):The size of the media in each slot. NOTE: The media capacity you choose in the Add new pseudo library dialog box is the size of each slot in the library. Make sure your available disk space can accommodate these requirements. 5. Click OK to start building the library. When the library has been created a confirming message appears, as shown in the following figure: 6. Click OK to close the dialog. Now you can add the library to the client by following the normal steps used to add libraries. See Adding Libraries (page 81) for instructions.

346 334 Appendix E Creating Virtual Libraries To see that the devices you just added are available for use, open the Device Management window, as shown in the following example:

347 APPENDIX F Using the NetVault Configurator Using the NetVault Configurator n Machine Tab n License Tab n Service Tab n Packages Tab n General Tab n Fire Wall Tab n GUI Tab n Logging Daemon Tab n Media Manager Tab n Network Manager Tab n Schedule Manager Tab n Security Tab - 357

348

349 NetVault Administrator s Guide 337 Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVault installation, even if the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. There is no online help system for the Configurator. Normally, the Configurator is used to start and stop NetVault services which does not require assistance from Technical Support. However, it is recommended that other options be changed only with the guidance of BakBone Technical Support (page 6). This appendix explains all the options in the NetVault Configurator. Machine Tab The Machine tab details information about the machine NetVault is installed on, including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key after product purchase. The NetVault Configurator s Machine tab is shown in the following figure: Information available in the Machine Tab includes: n NetVault Machine Name: The name given to the NetVault server or client during installation, used to reference the NetVault machine while using NetVault. This name does not have to be the same as the host name, it can be different. Note that in naming a NetVault machine you cannot use special characters, punctuation characters, spaces or capital letters. For instance,

350 338 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator server, server1 and servernumber1 are acceptable, whereas server/1, server- 1, server1! or server1 are not. n Machine ID: The unique machine identification generated by NetVault, in most cases from the host name of the machine. License keys are generated from the machine ID and are tied to it. If the machine ID is changed, a new license key must be made. n Network Name(s): The host name of the NetVault server. Machines can have more than one network name also known as Aliases. n IP Address(es): The IP address of the computer. If multiple addresses are present all are displayed here whether they are on the same nic or on multiple nics. This is independent of any settings in the preferred/barred configuration. n NetVault Version: The version number of the NetVault installation. n O.S. Version: The version of the Operating System running on this computer. n NetVault Platform: The platform under which NetVault is operating. License Tab The License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of Applied Keys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same as that available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault s Domain Management window. The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:

351 NetVault Administrator s Guide 339 Information available in the License tab includes: n Server Capabilities: Lists the maximum Number of different server capabilities. Information displayed depends on the license installed. During an evaluation period all capabilities are enabled. With a permanent key installed only the purchased features are enabled and displayed here. n Serial Numbers of Applied Keys: The serial numbers installed on this computer. This is a list of ALL keys applied to this server/client. Keys applied to other machines are not displayed here. NOTE: If this is an evaluation installation, the length of the evaluation period and the number of days left in that period are displayed. If a permanent key is installed prior to the expiration of the evaluation period, both keys are listed. When the evaluation period expires, that information is removed from this display. Service Tab The Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, or after a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started. When upgrading to the most current NetVault release, you must start the service manually. The Current State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab. When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking the appropriate buttons on the Service tab. If you need assistance in stopping NetVault services, contact BakBone Technical Support (page 6). NOTE: When stopping NetVault, wait for at least 30 seconds after the service shows Stopped before restarting the service to ensure that all processes were stopped correctly.

352 340 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator s Service tab is shown in the following figure: Information available in the Service Tab includes: n Current State: Shows if NetVault is running or stopped. n Stop NetVault: Click this button to stop the NetVault service. n Start NetVault: Click the button to start the NetVault service. Packages Tab The Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault Application Plugin Module software. The APM installation procedure is detailed in Installing NetVault Plugins and APM s (page 25). The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locally on a NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from the NetVault server.

353 NetVault Administrator s Guide 341 The NetVault Configurator s Packages tab is shown in the following figure: Information available in the Packages Tab includes: n Install Software: Click this button to install new software (i.e., plugins) to the server. Note that this only installs packages on the local machine. To install a package on another NetVault machine, use the Client Management window. n Installed Packages: The list of packages installed on this machine, along with the date installed and any flags associated with the package. n Remove Software: Click this button to remove selected software from this machine. To remove software from another machine, use the Client Management window. General Tab The General Tab allows you to change the pathnames of the directories used by NetVault, select a language and set buffer sizes.

354 342 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator s General tab is shown in the following figure: Information available on the General Tab includes: n Generate debugging files: When enabled, a normal level of trace is generated for all processes. A trace file is created for each process and placed in a trace directory in the root of the NetVault directory. No additional action is required to create normal level trace. To create higher levels of trace the programs.cfg file must be modified to set the appropriate trace level. NOTE: Trace generates large files very quickly, and some processes are more verbose than others. Make sure you have sufficient space to store trace files and leave trace turned on only as long as you need it. Some processes may need to be restarted before doing a trace. Consult Technical Support (page 6) for assistance with trace levels and restarting processes. n Database Directory: The pathname of the NetVault database directory. n Trace Directory: The pathname of the NetVault trace directory. n Log Directory: The pathname of the NetVault log directory.

355 NetVault Administrator s Guide 343 n Temporary Directory: The pathname of the NetVault temporary directory. NOTE: Make sure you have enough space allocated for these directories if you are relocating them. For example, relocating the tmp directory to a new location without enough space causes backup and restore jobs to fail. NetVault requires some temp space as a working area for creating and retrieving previous indexes. Also allocate enough space for the NetVault database to grow if media is not being rotated. n Language Selection: Choose the desired language to be used in NetVault. Normally the only selection available is English, unless the installation has been localized. n Minimum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the minimum size of kernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If the minimum buffer size is increased, performance increases. n Maximum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the maximum size of kernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If the maximum buffer size is decreased, the reliability of the connection may be increased. n Minimum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receive buffer. See minimum send buffer for further explanation. n Maximum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receive buffer. See maximum send buffer for further explanation. n Package Install System Check: When enabled, NetVault checks the installed packages and makes sure they are for the operating system the package requires. For instance, if you attempt to install a Solaris package on a Windows machine a warning message appears. Plugin Options Tab The Plugin Options tab contains information and the unique settings for the plugins installed on your machine.

356 344 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator An example of the NetVault Configurator s Plugin Options tab is shown in the following figure: Because the information appearing in this tab varies by plugin, the options and settings will be different for each installation. If you do not understand any of these options, contact Technical Support (page 6). Fire Wall Tab The Fire Wall Tab allows you to identify ports through which data can be transferred across a secured network firewall. The port identification must be configured on the machines with attached devices. NOTE: Make sure that the specified ports within the firewall are open and properly configured.

357 NetVault Administrator s Guide 345 The NetVault Configurator s Fire Wall Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Fire Wall tab includes: n Valid Ports for Devices: Enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port ID s in the box. GUI Tab Settings in the GUI tab allow you to specific screen refresh rates, change display colors, control messages in the Jobs window and set the number of messages appearing in the Logs window. The GUI tab includes an individual tab for each of the settings available, as described below: GUI Tab (Refresh Rates) Settings in the Refresh Rates tab control the speed at which the screen is updated in the GUI to reflect changes in NetVault. Small numbers increase the rate of screen update at the expense of increased CPU load. Large refresh rates slow the screen update but lightens the CPU load.

358 346 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The Refresh Rates tab within the NetVault Configurator s GUI tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available on the Refresh Rates tab within the GUI tab includes: n Job refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Jobs window. n Device refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Device window. n Job Monitor refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Job Monitor window. GUI Tab (Colors) Settings in the Colors tab control the color of the three states of jobs in the Jobs window status tab.

359 NetVault Administrator s Guide 347 The Colors tab within the NetVault Configurator s GUI tab appears as shown in the following figure: The colors red, green and blue are used in various combinations to display the scheduled, running and completed jobs in the Jobs window. Increasing or decreasing the RGB values changes the colors. Color intensity can be changed for each of the following: n Color of scheduled jobs (RGB) n Color of running jobs (RGB) n Color of completed jobs (RGB) GUI Tab (Jobs) The option available in the Jobs Tab of the NetVault Configurator GUI tab allows you to override the default constraint of supplying a target set for duplicate media.

360 348 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The Jobs tab within the NetVault Configurator s GUI Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available on the Jobs tab within the GUI tab includes: n Permit Duplicate Phase with no Target Set: A target set is required for duplicate media unless this option is selected to override it. If multiple duplication jobs claim all the drives to read the source media, there will be no drives available for the target media. To prevent a deadlock situation when using the same target for all your duplicates, leave this option cleared. GUI Tab (Logging) The Logging tab within the GUI tab allows you to control the number of log messages stored. The number of log messages affects the speed of opening the logs window and the disk space used to store the messages. This is especially important when controlling a domain server over a network or a dial-up connection. Setting an unlimited number of job messages on an NT system can use all available system memory and render the machine unusable. Contact Technical Support (page 6) for assistance in setting the number of log messages.

361 NetVault Administrator s Guide 349 The Logging tab within the NetVault Configurator s GUI Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available on the Logging tab within the GUI tab includes: n Maximum log messages in log window: Enter the desired number of messages in the box or click the up and down arrows until the desired number appears. By allowing only 1,000 log messages, the amount of used disk space is kept to a minimum. Logging Daemon Tab NetVault s logging daemon sends warning messages to the screen when the thresholds set in the Logging Daemon tab are in danger of being exceeded.

362 350 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator s Logging Daemon tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Logging Daemon tab includes: n Disk Space Warning Threshold (percent full): Specifies the percentage of space which can be used for the tmp directory of the NetVault database on Windows NT systems only, based on the disk or partition that NetVault is installed on. When this level is reached, NetVault logs a message to inform you that you are running out of free space and also sends a warning to the NT event viewer. Administrators should check the log messages and apply appropriate measures to assure adequate free space. CAUTION: If the disk space level is exceeded, the NetVault Database can be damaged. n Log file page size (Kb): The value entered here is the size of each of the files (two) created at the time NetVault is opened. Activity is logged to the first file until the allocated space in that file is used. When the first file is full, NetVault creates a third file of the same size and continues logging activity to the second file. These files are created as sparse files, so that if you run out of hard disk space logging can continue in the pre-allocated files.

363 NetVault Administrator s Guide 351 n Message Response Interval (in milliseconds): When opening a Logs window the opening progress dialog box appears. The Cancel buttononthis dialog box allows you to cancel the Logs window. Decreasing the response interval increases the responsiveness of the Cancel button at the expense of CPU performance. n Outgoing message bundle size: Log messages are sent to the Logs window in bundles to improve performance, the size of which is defined in this option. n Minimum time (in milliseconds) between progress updates: The progress dialog box that appears when opening logs displays the number of log messages loaded. This setting specifies how often the dialog box information is updated. n Minimum warning level to send to system log: This setting controls how much of the NetVault logs are sent to the operating system logs. Media Manager Tab The options in the Media Manager tab allow you to control the life of savesets on a piece of imported media, use barcodes as labels and set the backup and restore priority levels. The NetVault Configurator s Media Manager Tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Media Manager tab includes:

364 352 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator n Minimum life for imported backups (days): When media is deleted from the NetVault database or a tape from another NetVault server is used, it appears in the Media Management window as FOREIGN. To access the data through NetVault, scan the tape to build the contents back into the database using the tape index. The value entered here controls the life of the savesets on the tape once it has been scanned. Any existing life spans of savesets on tape remain in effect after being scanned; the setting in this option affects only expired savesets and designates its life span after being imported into the database. n Use barcodes as labels: When selected, this option automatically uses the barcode of a tape as the tape label. The default naming convention is <server name><date>. When using barcodes you may want the tape name to match the barcode. This option applies only if your library has a barcode reader and your tapes have barcodes. n Priority Settings: Backup and Restore jobs can be given specific priorities to change the order in which the jobs are performed. The remaining options in the Media Manager set default priorities as shown in the following table: Types of Priorities Priority Number Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20 Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5 Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30 Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5 Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10 Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10 The following information applies to the types of priorities: n For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0 runs the request in the background. n A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup job requires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possible for a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. In order to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue without interruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to a smaller number than that of other requests. Network Manager Tab The Network Manager tab settings allow you to specify the amount of time NetVault waits with no activity before dropping network connections, and broadcasts to local network machines.

365 NetVault Administrator s Guide 353 The NetVault Configurator s Network Manager tab contains three additional tabs and appears as shown in the following figure: Network Manager Tab (Timeouts) Settings in the Timeouts tab within the Network Manager tab, which control the time NetVault waits to make remote connections, are shown in the figure above and include the following: n Time (in seconds) to complete a remote connection: The maximum amount of time NetVault attempts to make a remote connection. n Time (in seconds) wait before dropping inactive connection: The maximum amount of time NetVault leaves an inactive session running before closing the connection. n Keep Alive rate (in seconds): NetVault sends broadcasts at designated intervals during active connections (e.g., during backups and restores) to assure that the network connection is still active between the NetVault machines in the domain. This setting allows you to send message more or less frequently. n Time (in seconds) between availability broadcasts: An availability broadcast is a message sent from one NetVault machine to all other NetVault machines informing them of its name and how it can be contacted. The value in this option defines the time between availability broadcasts. If the interval is too small network traffic increases, too large and the list of available machines

366 354 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator may not be displayed as quickly as needed. You can manually add an undisplayed client using the find utility. n Time (in seconds) between security broadcasts: The security broadcast results in the display of a key on the machine icon seen in the Client Management window. The key in the icon indicates the presence of security and the need for a password to access that machine. Network Manager Tab (Connections) Settings in the Connections tab within the Network Manager tab control broadcasts to local machines. The Connections tab within the NetVault Configurator s Network Manager tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Connections tab includes: n Broadcast details to machines on local networks: To automatically display machines in a client s window, select this option. If this option is cleared you can add clients only by using the Find utility in the client s window to locate the desired client. When this option is cleared, the amount of network traffic generated by NetVault is reduced; however, adding clients becomes more

367 NetVault Administrator s Guide 355 complicated. This option should only be cleared when it is necessary to reduce network traffic. NOTE: NetVault uses UDP broadcasts. UDP does not route over different network segments and machines on different segments do not appear automatically. They must be found manually. n Preferred network address: Only used when your machine is connected to multiple networks either via multiple nics or by virtual IP addressing. To use this option, enter the IP address of the interface (not the address of the machine) you prefer NetVault to use as its primary access point no matter which network(s) the machine is connected to. If this primary network access is not available, NetVault uses one of the other available networks. n Comma separated list of barred address(es): Thelistofaddressesyou want to prevent NetVault from using should be entered in this box, separated by a comma. Using a combination of these two options can be very helpful to direct your network s traffic. For instance, you may have a network specifically for backups and another network you do not want to use for backup data. In this case you can bar one network so that NetVault will not use it at all and force the network designated for backup traffic to be the first one NetVault uses. CAUTION: Be careful that you do not bar all networks on your server since you will not be able to perform any backups. Schedule Manager Tab The Schedule Manager Tab of the NetVault Configurator allows you to set the number of days job histories and status are kept, as well as specify the number of active jobs that can run simultaneously.

368 356 Appendix F Using the NetVault Configurator The NetVault Configurator s Schedule Manager tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available on the Schedule Manager tab includes: n Number of days to keep job history: This setting limits the number of days of job information displayed in the Jobs window s History tab. n Number of days to keep job status: This setting limits the number of days of jobinformationdisplayedinthejobwindow sstatustab. n Maximum simultaneously active jobs: The value entered in this setting limits the number of jobs than can be running at any one time. Because each running job consumes a small amount of shared memory, it can be advantageous to specify a small number of jobs that can run simultaneously. When setting this value, keep in mind that only a small number of jobs can be writing to media at any given time. If you submit a large number of jobs, those over the limit will stay pending until the required resources are available, affected also by the number of available tape drives.

369 NetVault Administrator s Guide 357 Security Tab In the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or client installation and disable security. When security is disabled, the machine can be accessed by any NetVault Server. The NetVault Configurator s Security tab appears as shown in the following figure: Information available in the Security tab includes: n Disable Security: When selected, this option allows any NetVault server to add your machine to its list of clients. Clear this option to require the NetVault server to provide a password in order to add your machine to a list of clients. n New Password: To change the machine password enter it in this box. n Confirm Password: Enter the new password again in this box.

370

371 APPENDIX G Using the Reporting Tool Using the Reporting Tool Running nvreport from the Command Line Report Arguments Simple Report Example Using Filters Example Sorting Output Creating Custom Templates n Making New Templates n Using the Server Argument Fields Available for Reports n Report: jobdefinitions (jd) n Report: jobhistory (jh) n Report: advancedoptions (ao) n Report: schedules (sc) n Report: backuptargets (bt) n Report: selections (se) Constants and Syntax - 370

372

373 NetVault Administrator s Guide 361 Using the Reporting Tool NetVault provides the ability to produce reports on jobs, drives and media through the use of a command line reporting utility. Reports are based on template files that define the information and layout of the reports. The templates can be customized to your specifications. Information in the reports can be sorted and filtered using mathematical operators. Because the report utility uses a command line method, it is recommended that you use templates and batch or script files to automate report generation. Running nvreport from the Command Line The nvreport binary is located in the netvault/util directory. Report templates are stored in the /netvault6/reports/templates directory. To access the help system for the nvreport utility, navigate to /netvault/util and run nvreport -help to list the syntax of nvreport which is nvreport -argument value -argument value Report Arguments Valid report arguments are described in the following table: Long Argument Short Argument Description help h or? Displays basic help information, including details on how to request additional information. reptype r Identifies the nvreport to be produced. format f Identifies the fields to be included in the report. server v Identifies the server to be queried. sort s Specifies how the output data is sorted. include i Specified a set of conditions that must be met for a record to be included in a report. exclude e Specified a set of conditions that, when met, exclude items from a report. template t Identifies the nvreport template to be used.

374 362 Appendix G Using the Reporting Tool Simple Report Example This section describes a simple process used to produce a report on jobs that have been run and their status. Start with the jobhistory report. To run this report issue the command nvreport -r jh The report output appears as follows: JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:02: backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct :12 00:00:26 By default all the fields shown above are included in the report. To include specific fields, issue the command nvreport -help fields jobhistory to list the fields available for inclusion in this particular report. See Creating Custom Templates (page 365) for a complete list of the fields available for each type of report. To define the fields you want to include in the output, issue the following command nvreport -r jh -f %exitstatus %startdate %jobid -s %exitstatus %startdate %jobid which calls the jobhistory template (jh), includes fields (f) exitstatus, startdate and jobid and sorts (s) the report by exitstatus, startdate and jobid. This produces the following output: JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:02: backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct :12 00:00:26 Exit Status Start Date JobID Backup Comp 23 Oct

375 NetVault Administrator s Guide 363 Exit Status Start Date JobID Backup Comp 23 Oct Backup Comp 23 Oct Backup Comp 24 Oct IMPORTANT: Using format only affects the fields shown in the report. It does not affect the selection of records included in the output. To filter the records in the output use the include and exclude arguments. Using Filters Example A simple example of excluding data from the report output is explained in this section. For the report just produced you may want to only see the jobs run yesterday, not those run prior to yesterday. To search for jobs with a start date greater than yesterday, issue the following command: nvreport -r jh -i startdate > 2000/10/23 which returns the following output: JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct :12 00:00:26 To use a filter string to include or exclude fields, apply the following argument: %[fieldname][operator][constant] for example: %ID = 23 where: n fieldname can be any valid field name included in the report s format string. To see the list of valid field names issue the command nvreport -help fields [report name] n operator can be: greater than (>), greater than or equal to (>=), less than (<), less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=) and not equal to (!=). n constant is the value you want to find in the specified field. In addition, filtering expressions can be linked using the Boolean operator AND and OR. Brackets can be used to order the Boolean expressions as shown in the following simple example: (%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid <5) OR %jdefntype = restoreid

376 364 Appendix G Using the Reporting Tool or in this more complex example: nvreport -r jh -include ((%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid < 5) OR %phaseid = 12) OR (%jdefntype = restore AND %phaseid = 23) This example illustrates the way you can nest statements to create sophisticated filters. Sorting Output The sort argument is used to order the records included in a report s output. The sort specification format is %fieldname[+-] For example, if you entered %id+, the records are sorted in ascending order by ID. If you entered %title-, the records appear by title in descending order. Multiple sort expressions can be combined in a specified order. For example, if you entered %type+ %jobid+ %title-, the data is sorted by ascending type, then by ascending job ID, then by descending title. The command nvreport -r jh -s %jobid+ returns the following output: JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:02: backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct :12 00:00:26 The command nvreport -r jh -s %jobid- returns this output: JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct :12 00:02: backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct :33 00:00: backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct :33 00:00:00 Notice that the order of the jobs is reversed from that of the first report. Filter arguments can be applied to any of the relevant fields in the report being run.

377 NetVault Administrator s Guide 365 Creating Custom Templates In order to prevent having to enter the series of commands used to produce a report each time you want to run the report, you can create and save report templates to be used whenever desired. IMPORTANT: Save the existing template to a new file name before making changes. Then you will always have the current template to begin customizing new reports. The following is one of the report templates located in the /netvault6/reports directory: %REPTYPE jobdefinitions %FORMAT %ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER %SORT %ID+ This template, the job definitions report, shows the basic fields and sort arguments used in the report. The first line is the name of the report. The second line defines the format of the report and the order of field display. The third line defines the sort for the data displayed in the report output. Note that one of the fields includes a double colon with a number after it. Each field is assigned a default number of characters for displaying its value. If you want to increase or decrease the default value, enter the double colon and the number of characters to be displayed after the specific field. In the job definitions report only six of the available fields are included for display in the output. The output of this report appears as follows: ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger 1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System 2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System 3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System 4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System The following example shows how to add another field to the list of included fields: %REPTYPE jobdefinitions %FORMAT %ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER %AOPTSVERIFY %SORT %ID+

378 366 Appendix G Using the Reporting Tool The output from the second example now includes the Vrfy column and appears as follows: ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger Vrfy 1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System no 2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System yes 3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System no 4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System no You can filter the data appearing in the output by adding include or exclude statements. On the command line the syntax is -i or -include, whereas in a report template the argument is preceeded with a % sign. In the following example, the job history template, there is no filter applied: %REPTYPE jobhistory %FORMAT %JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE %EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME %SORT %JOBID %INSTANCEID+ %PHASEID+ When a filter is added the report appears as follows: %REPTYPE jobhistory %FORMAT %JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE %EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME %include (%startdate > 2000/10/23) and (%exitstatus = backup complete) %SORT %EXITSTATUS+ Note the brackets around each filter statement. Also note the use of and to combine the two statements. You can also use an or operator, if desired. When applying more than 2 filters, it is important to use double brackets to denote the order in which they should be applied. Make sure the order and logic of the filters is correct or the resulting output may not be what you expect. You can also run multiple reports and direct the output into one large report. Making New Templates When NetVault is installed, a default set of templates are stored in the installation directory. These templates are limited in scope and designed to be used as a basis for building your specific templates. When creating new templates, it is recommended that you store them in the /netvault6/reports/templates directory. If you explicitly reference templates always enter the entire pathname to locate and retrieve them.

379 NetVault Administrator s Guide 367 Using the Server Argument Any NetVault server can run the report tool. Incorporating the -v command in the report allows you to run a report on your NetVault server remotely from your own workstation as long as NetVault has been installed on it. Running reports over the network generates a considerable amount of traffic, depending on the type of report being run and the amount of information on your system. Information sent over the network is not filtered until it reaches the destination machine. So no matter how much data the report outputs, you must search all the data present. In this type of case, consider logging in remotely to the NetVault server and running nvreport locally. Fields Available for Reports The Fields folder located within the netvault6/reports folder contains a file for each of the report templates each of which lists: CAUTION: Do not change the information in the Fields folder without assistance from Technical Support. n The fields available for that report type. n The number of characters the field outputs. This is the default length of the field and it can be modified. Add a double colon and the number of characters you want to output directly after the field name (e.g., Trigger::10, where Trigger is normally 12). n The type of data stored in the field (i.e., integer, string, date, time, etc.). The type of data in the field is the type that must be used whenever you include conditional statements in your report. For instance, to output only jobs scheduled to run on January 10th, the format is scheddate = 2000/01/10. DO NOT MODIFY THIS VALUE. n A nicename which is the column heading for included fields. For instance, the field phaseid is output to the column heading of Phase. The nicename can be modified.

380 368 Appendix G Using the Reporting Tool The following tables list, for each type of report, the fields available for use: Report: jobdefinitions (jd) aoptsbackupkeepcount aoptsprescriptarg id aoptsbackuptype aoptsuseprescript Options aoptscompress aoptsusepostscript Plugin aoptsduplicate aoptsverify RestoreClient aoptsdupschedset btarganydevice scheddate aoptsduptargset btargautolabel scheddaysofmonth aoptskeepfornumbacks btargdevicetree scheddaysofweek aoptskeepfortime btargfirstjob schedmethod aoptskeeptime btarggroup schedname aoptsmigrate btargmid schedrepeatperiod aoptsname btargminspace schedtime aoptsoriglife btargname schedtrigger aoptsowndiscardlife btargprotectafter schedtype aoptsownlifelength btargreusemedia schedweeksofmonth aoptspostscript btargspecminspace selecname aoptspostscriptarg btargtargetmedia selectree aoptsprescript Client Title Type

381 NetVault Administrator s Guide 369 Report: jobhistory (jh) enddate jdefnbtargminspace endtime jdefnbtargname exitstatus jdefnbtargprotectafter instanceid jdefnbtargreusemedia jdefnaoptsbackupkeepcount jdefnbtargspecminspace jdefnaoptsbackuptype jdefnbtargtargetmedia jdefnaoptscompress jdefnid jdefnaoptsduplicate jdefnclient jdefnaoptsdupschedset jdefnoptions jdefnaoptsduptargset jdefnplugin jdefnaoptskeepfornumbacks jdefnrestoreclient jdefnaoptskeepfortime jdefntitle jdefnaoptskeeptime jdefntype jdefnaoptsmigrate jdefnscheddate jdefnaoptsname jdefnscheddaysofmonth jdefnaoptsoriglife jdefnscheddaysofweek jdefnaoptsowndiscardlife jdefnschedmethod jdefnaoptsownlifelength jdefnschedname jdefnaoptspostscript jdefnschedrepeatperiod jdefnaoptspostscriptarg jdefnschedtime jdefnaoptsprescript jdefnschedtrigger jdefnaoptsprescriptarg jdefnschedtype jdefnaoptsusepostscript jdefnschedweeksofmonth jdefnaoptsuseprescript jdefnselecname jdefnaoptsverify jdefnselectree jdefnbtarganydevice JobID jdefnbtargdevicetree phaseid jdefnbtargautolabel runtime jdefnbtargfirstjob starttdate jdefnbtarggroup starttime jdefnbtargmid

382 370 Appendix G Using the Reporting Tool Report: advancedoptions (ao) BackupKeepCount KeepForTime PostScriptArg BackupType KeepTime PostScript Compress Migrate PreScriptArg Duplicate Name PreScript DupSchedSet OrigLife UsePostScript DupTargSet OwnDiscardLife UsePreScript KeepForNumBacks OwnLifeLength Verify Report: schedules (sc) Date Method Time DaysOfMonth Name Trigger DaysOfWeek RepeatPeriod Type Weeks OfMonth Report: backuptargets (bt) AnyDevice Group ProtectAfter AutoLabel MID ReuseMedia DeviceTree MinSpace SpecMinSpace FirstJob Name TargetMedia Report: selections (se) Name Tree Constants and Syntax This section defines the formats (syntax) allowed for constants: Constant Formats string any character enclosed in single or double quotes integer a number time HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11) HHMMSS (e.g., )

383 NetVault Administrator s Guide 371 Constant timepassed HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11) HHMMSS (e.g., ) date YYYY/MM/DD (e.g., 2000/04/26) YYYYMMDD (e.g., ) boolean hdwmycount daysinweek Yes No True False Formats NNNN[HDWMY] 12H 2W 564M 44Y A string of days using the following abbreviations: SU = Sunday MO = Monday TU = Tuesday WE = Wednesday TH = Thursday FR = Friday SA = Saturday (e.g., MOWEFRSU for Monday, Wednesday, Friday and Sunday) daysinmonth A string of dates separated by commas (e.g., 1,2,4,8,10) weeksinmonth A string indicating the number of the week in the month (e.g., 145 for the first, fourth and fifth weeks, 13L for the first, third and Last week, etc.) selectiontree N/A pluginscreen N/A

384

385 Glossary A Add Library window The Add Library window controls the adding or modifying of libraries for the selected server. The Library Name field shows the selected library name, once added. The window contains tabbed control and information areas to allow different aspects of the library to be set up and viewed. Add Standalone Drive window The Add Standalone Drive window controls the adding or modifying of simple devices to the selected server. The Device Name field shows the selected device name, once added. The window contains control and information areas to allow the device to be chosen and added and the device details viewed. There is also a Configure button to allow the parameters of the device to be changed including Configuration, Performance and Statistics settings. Application Plugin Module (APM) B backup Backup window An Application Plugin Module provides a bridge from NetVault to another application. This allows you to use the NetVault GUI to control and manage your backup and restore operations in other databases. APM s are sold separately; contact your BakBone representative for more information. A NetVault backup is the saving of computer data onto media, under the control of a NetVault Server. With NetVault, many types of data may be backed up using the appropriate plugin (e.g. NetVault Database plugin, NT File System plugin, NT Registry plugin, UNIX File System plugin, etc.). The NetVault Backup window controls the scheduling of backups for the selected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbed control areas to allow different aspects of the backup to be set up

386 374 Glossary Backup Set C Client Management window Configurator cleaning drive D distributed devices device domain A Backup Set is the complete set of data stored on one or more items of media for a single backup job. The complete Backup Set may be contained as one Saveset on a single item of media, or it can be spread over several items of media (e.g. tapes), occupying a single unique Saveset on each media item. The NetVault Client Management window displays client information for the selected server. The window contains two list areas to display available machines and those added to NetVault as clients; there is also an area to find NetVault Machines not currently displayed in either list. The NetVault Configurator is a standard tool included with the NetVault installation. Normally the Configurator is used to start and stop NetVault services. It also provides information about the machine, the license(s) purchased for the machine, the software installed on the machine and a variety of other options used to manage security, interface appearance, logging and many more. For complete information on the NetVault Configurator see Using the NetVault Configurator (page 335). A cleaning drive is a drive with designated slots used to clean tapes. NetVault can use distributed devices, i.e. devices can be connected to any NetVault Node (NetVault server or client), not just to the NetVault server. A NetVault device is any equipment which can hold NetVault media (e.g. simple tape drives, tape libraries, pseudo disk libraries, optical drives, etc.). NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVault server, whatever computer they may be physically connected to (e.g. to a local or remote NetVault client, as well as locally on the NetVault server). A NetVault domain is the term used to signify a group of computers comprising a NetVault server, and a number of NetVault clients, (which may be on the local network, remotely via a bridge, gateway the Internet, etc.).

387 NetVault Administrator s Guide 375 Device Management window The NetVault Device Management window controls the devices added to the selected server. The window contains tabbed areas to allow different control or viewing of various functions Domain Management window The NetVault Domain Management window allows NetVault servers to be viewed and controlled. F Firewall Full backup G GUI I Instance Incremental backup A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a private network. Firewalls can be implemented in both hardware and software or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used to prevent unauthorized internet users from accessing private networks connected to the internet, especially intranets. All messages entering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, which examines each message and blocks those that do not meet the specified security criteria. A Full backup is a complete copy of selected data. The GUI or Graphical User Interface is used to access the windows and functions provided by NetVault to manage your hardware and software configurations and data storage. The interface contains the menu bar, command toolbars and a status line to aid in choosing the desired function. The Instance of a job is a number representing the number of times that this particular job has been submitted. The first time a new job is submitted, the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc. (even if you have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in between submissions, provided you do not change the job title). An Incremental backup is a copy of the changes made to files or databases since the last backup was performed. J Jobs window The NetVault Jobs window displays jobs submitted for the selected server. The window contains tabbed areas to allow viewing of various functions.

388 376 Glossary L Logs window License Library The NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlled by the selected server. Each log message is preceded with a colorcoded dot, which signifies the message's level of importance. The authorization number(s) for the BakBone product(s) you have purchased. A library is any combination of tapes, multi-drive tape jukeboxes, sequential devices, autochangers, autoloaders, disks, etc. NetVault controls the devices in a library and libraries can be shared among clients. M Media Management The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be examined for the selected server. The window contains a Media selection window area and Details tabbed areas to allow different aspects of either the media or saveset to be examined. N NAS NAS is the acronym for Network Attached Storage. Devices used in storage management can be directly attached to a network and accessed by all clients on the network. NetVault Database The NetVault database contains all the details for the installation of the NetVault server, including information on configuration, keys, logs, media and schedules. This information is critical to keeping NetVault operations available and recoverable in case of a catastrophic event. Node A NetVault Node is any networked computer with NetVault (server or client) software installed. A Node can act as a NetVault server for one NetVault domain, and at the same time be a NetVault client to another NetVault server in another NetVault domain.

389 NetVault Administrator s Guide 377 P Phase plugin When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicate is used the duplicate job is allocated the same Job ID and Job Title as the backup job, but the Phase for the duplicate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can be identified). In all other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1. This information is shown in the NetVault Server Status window, Job Status area. A plugin is a NetVault program module designed to add functionality to NetVault core features. Plugins included with the NetVault installation are the Data Copy, Consolidate File System Backups, File System and Raw Device. Policy Management Window The Policy Management window organizes and accesses the backup Policy Sets you have saved for selection, target and advanced options. Policy Set priorities R restore A Policy Set is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job, saved for future re-use. A Priority assigns the order in which jobs run. Default settings are found in the Using the NetVault Configurator (page 337). In addition, individual job priorities can be set to override the default settings. For more information, see The Media Requests Tab (page 72) in Chapter 4. A NetVault restore is the restoration of computer data from media, under the control of a NetVault server. With NetVault, many types of data may be restored using the appropriate plugin (e.g. NetVault Database plugin, NT File System plugin, NT Registry plugin, UNIX File System plugin, etc.). Data may be restored from a tape imported from another NetVault server's device using the media Scan facility. Data may also be restored to a different Target client, Location or Name, from that of the original backup. Restore window The NetVault Restore window controls the scheduling of restores for the selected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbed control areas to allow different aspects of the restore to be set up.

390 378 Glossary S Saveset Selection Sets Server Server Status window A Saveset is the set of data stored on a single item of media for a NetVault backup job. An item of media (e.g. a tape) may contain several Savesets, each a single Backup Set for a job; but a Backup Set may be large enough to be spread over several items of media, occupying a unique Saveset on each media item. Selection Sets allow often used selections in several tabs of both the Backup and Restore windows to be saved and used for multiple jobs. This time saving feature is described in Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263). A NetVault server controls all backup and restores for all NetVault clients in a NetVault domain., including the server machine itself acting as a client. NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVault server, wherever they may be physically connected (e.g. to a remote NetVault client, as well as locally). A NetVault server may be remotely controlled using NetVault Domain Management. The NetVault Server Status window displays status information for the selected server. The window contains individual, re-sizeable areas to display each type of information. Shared Devices A device being used by two or more machines through a shared-scsi or SAN (Storage Area Network) is a shared device. A shared drive can be used by NetVault as a local drive when backing up the client, increasing the efficiency of data transfer across the network. SAN (Storage Area Network) The Storage Area Network provides the ability to attach devices to client with high-speed connections to provide centralized tape storage and drive sharing. T target media Template Target media is a specific tape, disk or other piece of media where data being restored is placed. A template is a block or pattern used as a basis to build a new function (e.g., customized reports).

391 NetVault Administrator s Guide 379 tracing Tree Triggered Job Tracing is a NetVault utility that allows you to capture and store a history of events. With this file you can provide Technical Support (page 6) with enough information to diagnose a problem. A tree is another name for a hierarchical list which indents from trunk to branch to twig, etc. (but upside-down!). It is the method used for displaying data in both the NetVault Backup and Restore windows, using the relevant plugin or APM. NetVault backup and restore jobs can be created and saved as triggered jobs. They are only added to the schedule list when they are triggered using a provided nvtrigger program. V virtual library A virtual library is a library set up in a temporary area, such as a hard drive, used to perform disk staging and tape cleaning.

392

393 INDEX A add library window add standalone drive window adding a NetVault Client clients libraries shared libraries Adding Libraries Add Library Screen Functions Administrator s Guide, about... 4 advanced features backup life compression duplication nvtrigger commands pre and post scripts verify after backup advanced options tab in backup window in restore window advancedoptions report AIX 4.2/4.3 installing NetVault software on AIX 4.2/ APM (Application Plugin Module) Archive (Advanced Backup Option) B backup consolidating consolidating sets definition full incremental

394 382 Index life NetVault Database raw device (NT) raw device (UNIX) selecting data set simple to Specific Media window , 373 backup life option Backup Management Backup window functions Menus Incremental Backup Procedure Using the Advanced Options Tab Using the Backup Options Tab General Backup Options Using the Schedule Tab Using the Selections Tab Using the Target Tab Device Options General Options Media Options backup options tab, in backup window backup saveset commands, in media management backup saveset, status backup sets consolidating copying backup tab, in media management backup through mount points backup window... 52, backup options backup options tab miscellaneous switches buttons commands general backup options NT backup options schedule tab selections tab tabs type of backup

395 NetVault Administrator s Guide 383 UNIX Filesystem backup options backups copying , 152 incremental restoring incremental , 218 selections in NT selections in W2K simple backuptarget report BakBone Software... 6 basics block size C cleaning automatic interval drives... 97, 374 life of media manual slots client adding (to NetVault Server) finding Unlisted NetVault Machine Install Software (optional plugin) Properties , 121 client management , 105 available NetVault machines clients , 108 Find NetVault Machine , 109 client management window... 48, 105, 374 client status, in server status window client transfer nodes command line reports arguments example fields filtering sorting templates templates, new command toolbar commands

396 384 Index in logs window in restore window status configurator... 31, 335, 359, 374 fire wall tab general tab GUI tab license tab logging daemon tab machine tab media manager tab network manager tab packages tab plugin options tab running schedule manager tab security tab service tab configuring Linux NetVault consolidate file system backups plugin consolidating backups constants, report copying backup sets , 268 backups data CTN (client transfer node) D data copy plugin data stream data, searching for database management recovery restore sizing debugging details tab, in media management

397 NetVault Administrator s Guide 385 device management window... 47, 64, 375 device logs tab devices tab drive commands entry/exit port commands drive lights icons media requests tab tabs device management windows devices tab library commands device status, in server status window devices adding adding in W2K adding shared standalone drives connections creating creating virtual libraries definition of... 61, 374 distributed generating in Windows NT planning a shared installation setting up shared shared SCSI types dialogs edit drive filter options machine details disaster recovery disk devices... 94, 331, 332 Domain Network Diagram domain management available NetVault Servers icons available NetVault servers pop-up commands Controlled Servers

398 386 Index icons pop-up commands Find NetVault Machine Server, making default for control window... 48, 117 domain management window domain, definition of drive lights, in server status window drives cleaning scanning dumping log files duplication, of backup DVD-RAM E edit drive dialog errors for jobs in searches F features advanced NetVault... 3 fields reports file system plugin selections in NT selections in W2K filter options dialog filter options, in restore window by date range show on-line status filtering logs reports finding a NetVault machine , 121 an unlisted NetVault machine fire wall tab, configurator firewall, definition of

399 NetVault Administrator s Guide 387 firewalls... 94, 288 full backup G general backup options general tab, configurator generations Glossary GUI... 43, 375 GUI tab, configurator H hardware support help... 5 history tab in jobs management window in media management window I Icons Client Status Clients List Controlled Servers Area Machine Available NetVault Machines , 118 server status importing media incremental backups procedure restoring , 218 installing NetVault software... 9 on AIX 4.2/4/ on Compaq TRU on FreeBSD on HP9000/700/ on HP-UX 10/ on IRIX 6.2/ on LINUX on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS on SCO Open Server

400 388 Index on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) on Sun Solaris on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) on UnixWare on UnixWare on Windows on Windows 95/98 Client on Windows NT on Windows NT packages plugins instance introduction to NetVault... 1 J job logs, extended job management , 241 deleting using history tabbed area pop-up commands job management window Using the History Tab using the Jobs Tab pop-up commands using the Status Tab Log Entry Headings pop-up commands job status, in server status window jobdefinitions report jobhistory report jobs errors history logs scheduling status triggering warnings window... 54, 375 jobs tab, in jobs management window jukeboxes... 61

401 NetVault Administrator s Guide 389 L libraries... 81, 376 adding shared creating pseudo/virtual creating virtual jukeboxes stackers virtual , 379 virtual libraries library management license license tab, configurator licenses for NetVault products Linux configuring uninstalling loading sets log files dumping logging daemon tab, configurator logs extended filtering job messages viewing extended window... 55, 251, 376 buttons comands M Machine Details dialog machine tab, configurator managing clients devices domains jobs , 241 libraries NetVault database software... 7 media

402 390 Index importing unknown scanning target media management Backup Saveset commands Status details tab history tab library Info tab Media Commands Properties Remove Status media request tab pop-up commands statistics tab status information media management window... 50, 127, 376 media manager tab, configurator memory size menu bar modified files during backup modify sets mount points, backing up MP-RAS uninstalling N NAS (Network Attached Storage) NetVault basics configurator... 31, 335, 359, 374 configuring database database backup database restore database size disaster recovery features... 3 introduction to NetVault... 1 licenses for products... 26

403 NetVault Administrator s Guide 391 node plugins... 4 Software... 7 uninstalling NetVault Server Status Client Status Device Status Drive Lights Job Status Completed Job commands Running Job commands Scheduled Job commands Operator Status NetVault software installing... 9 installing on AIX 4.2/ installing on Compaq TRU installing on FreeBSD installing on HP9000/700/ installing on HP-UX 10/ installing on IRIX 6.2/ installing on LINUX installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS installing on SCO Open Server installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) installing on Sun Solaris installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) installing on UnixWare installing on UnixWare installing on Windows installing on Windows 95/98 Client installing on Windows NT installing on Windows NT Network Attached Storage (NAS) Network Diagram network manager tab, configurator node nvreport arguments example fields filtering

404 392 Index sorting templates templates, new nvtrigger commands O operating system support operator status, in server status window options tab, in restore window P package installation packages tab, configurator Performance Tuning block size data stream Gathering Statistics memory size Optimizing Drive Performance , 294 phase platform support plugin options tab, configurator plugins consolidate file system backups data copy definition of installing NetVault... 4 properties of in Client Management , 121 raw device policy management window... 56, 377 policy management, using policy sets copy definition of loading modify saving schedule types of policy templates , 265

405 NetVault Administrator s Guide 393 pop-up commands media management window pre and post scripts priorities default settings job priorities of requests pseudo (virtual) libraries R raw device plugin backup (NT) backup (UNIX) restore (NT) restore (UNIX) renaming a file for restore , 207 directory for restore reports advancedoptions backuptarget constants jobdefinitions jobhistory schedules selections syntax request priorities... 72, 76 restore , 377 advanced options comprehensive filter options By Date Range Show On-Line Status incremental backups NetVault database Options raw device (NT) raw device (UNIX) renaming a directory renaming a file , 207 scheduling

406 394 Index search for data setting selection method simple to Specific Client window... 53, 377 Restore Management Restoring Incremental Backups Using the Advanced Options Tab Using the Restore Options Tab Types of Standard Restore Options Using the Schedule Tab Using the Selections Tab Data Selection Example Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection Selecting the Data to be Restored Setting Restore Selection Method Using Restore Filter Options Using Restore Search Facility Using the Target Client Tab restore options UNIX Windows Windows NT restore window commands selecting data selections tab tabs S SAN (Storage Area Network)... 63, 378 SAN devices Saveset Information in Details Area savesets , 378 saving sets scanning drives media schedule manager tab, configurator schedule tab in backup window in restore window schedules report

407 NetVault Administrator s Guide 395 scheduling backup jobs , 228 immediate jobs once options repeating restore jobs , 228 sets triggered scripts, using search errors searching for data... 57, 209 security tab, configurator segment tabs, in media management , 138 selecting data for backup in restore window selecting items selection set selections report selections tab in backup window in restore window server server status window... 50, 139, 378 client status device status job status , 144 operator status service tab, configurator set (policy) templates , 265 setting selection method for restore settingupadevice shared devices shared devices installation, planning for shared SCSI devices... 61, 63 shared standalone drives, adding to clients simple procedure backups restore

408 396 Index size of NetVault database slots, cleaning software configuring installing NetVault... 9 installing on AIX 4.2/ installing on Compaq TRU installing on FreeBSD installing on HP9000/700/ installing on HP-UX 10/ installing on IRIX 6.2/ installing on LINUX installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS installing on SCO Open Server installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) installing on Sun Solaris installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) installing on UnixWare installing on UnixWare installing on Windows installing on Windows 95/98 Client installing on Windows NT installing on Windows NT support uninstalling NetVault Solaris uninstalling sorting reports stackers statistics statistics tab, in media management status cleaning drives/slots status commands, in jobs management window status information, in media management status tab, in job management window status, of jobs Storage Area Network using support

409 NetVault Administrator s Guide 397 hardware operating system platforms software support, technical... 6 syntax, report T tape cleaning tape libraries, virtual Target Device Target Media , 378 target tab, in backup window technical support... 6 templates policy reports , 366 toolbar, commands tracing... 37, 379 creating files tree triggered job triggering jobs using nvtrigger , 285 troubleshooting using log files types of backups U uninstalling from Linux from MP-RAS from Solaris from UNIX from Windows NT NetVault UNIX filesystem backup options restore options uninstalling user interface... 43, 375 using Advanced features Backup and Restore Advanced Options

410 398 Index Backup Life (NetVault Backup only) Compression (NetVault Backup and Restore) Duplication (NetVault Backup only) Pre and Post Scripts (NetVault Backup and Restore) Verify after Backup (NetVault Backup only) triggering jobs using nvtrigger nvtrigger commands triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name) triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name) UNIX example Windows NT example using Filter Options Dialog using help... 5 using Logs filtering Filtering Options Dialog Viewing Extended Logs Errors Job Messages Warnings using Policy (Set) Templates Guidelines Set Control Functions Saving a Set using the Save As button Standard Policy (Set) Facilities Set Controls Standard Policy (Set) features using policy management using Regular Expressions , 321 using the configurator , 359 using the Edit Drive Dialog V Verify virtual libraries , 379 creating W warnings for jobs windows add library add standalone drive

411 NetVault Administrator s Guide 399 backup... 52, 159, 373 client management... 48, 105, 374 device management... 47, 64, 65, 66, 375 domain management... 48, 117, 375 jobs... 54, 375 logs... 55, 251, 376 media management... 50, 127, 376 policy management... 56, 377 restore... 53, 199, 377 server status... 50, 139, 378 Windows 2000 adding devices backup options file system selections restore options Windows NT backup options devices file system selections installing NetVault software on restore options uninstalling... 39

412

for the VaultDR Online Plugin for Linux-based Operating Systems

for the VaultDR Online Plugin for Linux-based Operating Systems Redefining Data Protection Title Page User s Guide for the VaultDR Online Plugin for Linux-based Operating Systems NVE 7009-36B 01/19-07 Copyrights NetVault:Backup - User s Guide for the VaultDR Online

More information

Yosemite Server Backup Installation Guide

Yosemite Server Backup Installation Guide Yosemite Server Backup Installation Guide Part number: First edition: October, 2010 Legal and notice information Copyright 2004, 2012 Barracuda Networks, Inc. Under copyright laws, the contents of this

More information

VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide

VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide VERITAS Backup Exec 9.1 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide N109548 Disclaimer The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software Corporation makes

More information

CA ARCserve Backup. UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide. r16

CA ARCserve Backup. UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide. r16 CA ARCserve Backup UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide r16 This Documentation, which includes embedded help systems and electronically distributed materials, (hereinafter referred to as the Documentation )

More information

VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers

VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers VERITAS Backup Exec TM 10.0 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide N134418 July 2004 Disclaimer The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice. VERITAS Software

More information

Using Symantec NetBackup with Symantec Security Information Manager 4.5

Using Symantec NetBackup with Symantec Security Information Manager 4.5 Using Symantec NetBackup with Symantec Security Information Manager 4.5 Using Symantec NetBackup with Symantec Security Information Manager Legal Notice Copyright 2007 Symantec Corporation. All rights

More information

Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery for Dell NetVault Backup Server 10.5. User s Guide

Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery for Dell NetVault Backup Server 10.5. User s Guide Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery for Dell NetVault Backup Server 10.5 User s Guide Copyright 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual

More information

EMC Avamar 7.2 for IBM DB2

EMC Avamar 7.2 for IBM DB2 EMC Avamar 7.2 for IBM DB2 User Guide 302-001-793 REV 01 Copyright 2001-2015 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published in USA. Published June, 2015 EMC believes the information in this publication

More information

WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold v16.2 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring Ipswitch WhatsUp Gold v16.2 using WhatsUp Setup Installing WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup... 1 Security guidelines

More information

NetVault : Backup. User s Guide for the VaultDR System Plugins

NetVault : Backup. User s Guide for the VaultDR System Plugins NetVault : Backup User s Guide for the VaultDR System Plugins VaultDR Offline Plugin ver. 5.6 (VaultOS) VaultDR Online Plugin for Windows ver. 3.5 VaultDR Online Plugin for Linux ver. 3.1 VaultDR Server

More information

Getting Started with. Ascent Capture Internet Server 5. 10300260-000 Revision A

Getting Started with. Ascent Capture Internet Server 5. 10300260-000 Revision A Ascent Capture Internet Server 5 Getting Started with Ascent Capture Internet Server 5 10300260-000 Revision A Copyright Copyright 2001 Kofax Image Products. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA. The information

More information

WebCT 3.7 Campus Edition System Administrator s Guide. Technical Communications

WebCT 3.7 Campus Edition System Administrator s Guide. Technical Communications WebCT 3.7 Campus Edition System Administrator s Guide Technical Communications Revised May 6, 2002 CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TO WEBCT...6 TYPES OF WEBCT USERS...6 Administrator...6 Helpdesk user...7 Designer...7

More information

MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager

MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager MGC WebCommander Web Server Manager Installation and Configuration Guide Version 8.0 Copyright 2006 Polycom, Inc. All Rights Reserved Catalog No. DOC2138B Version 8.0 Proprietary and Confidential The information

More information

Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager

Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager Page 1 of 63 Features - Microsoft Data Protection Manager TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - MICROSOFT DATA PROTECTION MANAGER INSTALLATION Install the Microsoft Data Protection Manager BACKUP

More information

How to Back Up and Restore an ACT! Database Answer ID 19211

How to Back Up and Restore an ACT! Database Answer ID 19211 How to Back Up and Restore an ACT! Database Answer ID 19211 Please note: Answer ID documents referenced in this article can be located at: http://www.act.com/support/index.cfm (Knowledge base link). The

More information

Installation Guide. Yosemite Backup. Yosemite Technologies, Inc

Installation Guide. Yosemite Backup. Yosemite Technologies, Inc Installation Guide Yosemite Backup Yosemite Technologies, Inc ii Yosemite Backup Installation Guide Notice Copyright Information in this document is subject to change without notice. makes no representations

More information

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows CA ARCserve Backup for Windows Agent for Microsoft SharePoint Server Guide r15 This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the "Documentation") are for

More information

Installation Guide for Workstations

Installation Guide for Workstations Installation Guide for Workstations Copyright 1998-2005, E-Z Data, Inc. All Rights Reserved. No part of this documentation may be copied, reproduced, or translated in any form without the prior written

More information

Symantec Backup Exec TM 11d for Windows Servers. Quick Installation Guide

Symantec Backup Exec TM 11d for Windows Servers. Quick Installation Guide Symantec Backup Exec TM 11d for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide September 2006 Symantec Legal Notice Copyright 2006 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, Backup Exec, and the Symantec

More information

Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows

Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows C ase Manag e m e n t by C l i e n t P rofiles Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows T E C H N O L O G Y F O R T H E B U S I N E S S O F L A W General Notes to Prepare for Installing

More information

Topaz Installation Sheet

Topaz Installation Sheet Topaz Installation Sheet P/N 460924001E ISS 08FEB12 Content Introduction... 3 Recommended minimum requirements... 3 Setup for Internet Explorer:... 4 Topaz installation... 10 Technical support... 14 Copyright

More information

CA ARCserve Backup. UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide. r15

CA ARCserve Backup. UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide. r15 CA ARCserve Backup UNIX and Linux Data Mover Guide r15 This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the "Documentation") are for your informational purposes

More information

Network Scanner Tool R3.1. User s Guide Version 3.0.04

Network Scanner Tool R3.1. User s Guide Version 3.0.04 Network Scanner Tool R3.1 User s Guide Version 3.0.04 Copyright 2000-2004 by Sharp Corporation. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited,

More information

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution Release 3.0 User Guide P/N 300-999-671 REV 02 Copyright 2007-2013 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published in the USA.

More information

FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1

FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1 FAS Asset Accounting FAS CIP Accounting FAS Asset Inventory SQL Server Installation & Administration Guide Version 2011.1 2011 Sage Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Published by Sage 2325 Dulles Corner

More information

4 Backing Up and Restoring System Software

4 Backing Up and Restoring System Software 4 Backing Up and Restoring System Software In this Chapter... Planning a Backup Strategy, 4-3 Preparing for Disaster Recovery, 4-4 Creating Boot Recovery Diskettes, 4-5 Making a Full Backup Tape, 4-8 Restoring

More information

Diamond II v2.3 Service Pack 4 Installation Manual

Diamond II v2.3 Service Pack 4 Installation Manual Diamond II v2.3 Service Pack 4 Installation Manual P/N 460987001B ISS 26APR11 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use Software license agreement FCC compliance Certification and compliance

More information

AccXES Account Management Tool Administrator s Guide Version 10.0

AccXES Account Management Tool Administrator s Guide Version 10.0 AccXES Account Management Tool Administrator s Guide Version 10.0 701P41531 May 2004 Trademark Acknowledgments XEROX, AccXES, The Document Company, and the identifying product names and numbers herein

More information

Contents. Hardware Configuration... 27 Uninstalling Shortcuts Black...29

Contents. Hardware Configuration... 27 Uninstalling Shortcuts Black...29 Contents Getting Started...1 Check your Computer meets the Minimum Requirements... 1 Ensure your Computer is Running in Normal Sized Fonts... 7 Ensure your Regional Settings are Correct... 9 Reboot your

More information

Networking Best Practices Guide. Version 6.5

Networking Best Practices Guide. Version 6.5 Networking Best Practices Guide Version 6.5 Summer 2010 Copyright: 2010, CCH, a Wolters Kluwer business. All rights reserved. Material in this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form

More information

Tivoli Access Manager Agent for Windows Installation Guide

Tivoli Access Manager Agent for Windows Installation Guide IBM Tivoli Identity Manager Tivoli Access Manager Agent for Windows Installation Guide Version 4.5.0 SC32-1165-03 IBM Tivoli Identity Manager Tivoli Access Manager Agent for Windows Installation Guide

More information

WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold v16.1 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring Ipswitch WhatsUp Gold v16.1 using WhatsUp Setup Installing WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup... 1 Security guidelines

More information

NetVault : Backup. Administrator s Guide. version 8.2.2. Version: Product Number: NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 04/24/09

NetVault : Backup. Administrator s Guide. version 8.2.2. Version: Product Number: NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 04/24/09 NetVault : Backup version 8.2.2 Administrator s Guide Version: Product Number: NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 NVG-101-8.2.2-EN-01 04/24/09 Copyrights NetVault: Backup v8.2.2 - Administrator s Guide Software Copyright

More information

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows CA ARCserve Backup for Windows Agent for Sybase Guide r16 This Documentation, which includes embedded help systems and electronically distributed materials, (hereinafter referred to as the Documentation

More information

HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide

HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide HAHTsite IDE and IP Installation Guide IDE and IP Installation Guide release 4.0 Notice Copyright 1999 HAHT Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved May 1999 MN01-C-00-400-00 No part of this publication may

More information

Moxa Device Manager 2.0 User s Guide

Moxa Device Manager 2.0 User s Guide First Edition, March 2009 www.moxa.com/product 2009 Moxa Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction without permission is prohibited. Moxa Device Manager 2.0 User Guide The software described in this manual

More information

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows CA ARCserve Backup for Windows Enterprise Option for SAP R/3 for Oracle Guide r15 This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the "Documentation") are

More information

SOS Suite Installation Guide

SOS Suite Installation Guide SOS Suite Installation Guide rev. 8/31/2010 Contents Overview Upgrading from SOS 2009 and Older Pre-Installation Recommendations Network Installations System Requirements Preparing for Installation Installing

More information

Moxa Device Manager 2.3 User s Manual

Moxa Device Manager 2.3 User s Manual User s Manual Third Edition, March 2011 www.moxa.com/product 2011 Moxa Inc. All rights reserved. User s Manual The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may be used

More information

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution Version 9.0 User Guide 302-001-755 REV 01 Copyright 2007-2015 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published in USA. Published

More information

Symantec Backup Exec 12.5 for Windows Servers. Quick Installation Guide

Symantec Backup Exec 12.5 for Windows Servers. Quick Installation Guide Symantec Backup Exec 12.5 for Windows Servers Quick Installation Guide 13897290 Installing Backup Exec This document includes the following topics: System requirements Before you install About the Backup

More information

InfoPrint 4247 Serial Matrix Printers. Remote Printer Management Utility For InfoPrint Serial Matrix Printers

InfoPrint 4247 Serial Matrix Printers. Remote Printer Management Utility For InfoPrint Serial Matrix Printers InfoPrint 4247 Serial Matrix Printers Remote Printer Management Utility For InfoPrint Serial Matrix Printers Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices

More information

Installing Management Applications on VNX for File

Installing Management Applications on VNX for File EMC VNX Series Release 8.1 Installing Management Applications on VNX for File P/N 300-015-111 Rev 01 EMC Corporation Corporate Headquarters: Hopkinton, MA 01748-9103 1-508-435-1000 www.emc.com Copyright

More information

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft Exchange Server Release 5.1

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft Exchange Server Release 5.1 EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft Exchange Server Release 5.1 Installation Guide P/N 300-004-750 REV A02 EMC Corporation Corporate Headquarters: Hopkinton, MA 01748-9103 1-508-435-1000 www.emc.com Copyright

More information

NetVault : Backup. for Exchange Server. Recovery Manager Integration Guide. Application Plugin Module (APM) version 4.5 MEG-103-4.

NetVault : Backup. for Exchange Server. Recovery Manager Integration Guide. Application Plugin Module (APM) version 4.5 MEG-103-4. NetVault : Backup Application Plugin Module (APM) for Exchange Server version 4.5 Recovery Manager Integration Guide MEG-103-4.5-EN-01 03/31/11 Copyrights NetVault: Backup APM for Exchange Server Recovery

More information

Attix5 Pro Server Edition

Attix5 Pro Server Edition Attix5 Pro Server Edition V7.0.3 User Manual for Linux and Unix operating systems Your guide to protecting data with Attix5 Pro Server Edition. Copyright notice and proprietary information All rights reserved.

More information

Pearl Echo Installation Checklist

Pearl Echo Installation Checklist Pearl Echo Installation Checklist Use this checklist to enter critical installation and setup information that will be required to install Pearl Echo in your network. For detailed deployment instructions

More information

Reflection DBR USER GUIDE. Reflection DBR User Guide. 995 Old Eagle School Road Suite 315 Wayne, PA 19087 USA 610.964.8000 www.evolveip.

Reflection DBR USER GUIDE. Reflection DBR User Guide. 995 Old Eagle School Road Suite 315 Wayne, PA 19087 USA 610.964.8000 www.evolveip. Reflection DBR USER GUIDE 995 Old Eagle School Road Suite 315 Wayne, PA 19087 USA 610.964.8000 www.evolveip.net Page 1 of 1 Table of Contents Overview 3 Reflection DBR Client and Console Installation 4

More information

Setting Up the Device and Domain Administration

Setting Up the Device and Domain Administration Setting Up the Device and Domain Administration Install a Host Support Program on your Computer A NetVault7.1 program must be installed on the computer(s) used by the administrator(s) of your backup service.

More information

Core Protection for Virtual Machines 1

Core Protection for Virtual Machines 1 Core Protection for Virtual Machines 1 Comprehensive Threat Protection for Virtual Environments. Installation Guide e Endpoint Security Trend Micro Incorporated reserves the right to make changes to this

More information

Universal Management Service 2015

Universal Management Service 2015 Universal Management Service 2015 UMS 2015 Help All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,

More information

UFR II Driver Guide. UFR II Driver Ver. 2.20 ENG

UFR II Driver Guide. UFR II Driver Ver. 2.20 ENG UFR II Driver Guide UFR II Driver Ver. 2.20 Please read this guide before operating this product. After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference. ENG 0 Ot UFR II Driver

More information

CA /BrightStor ARCserve9 Backup Software

CA /BrightStor ARCserve9 Backup Software CA /BrightStor ARCserve9 Backup Software The CA BrightStor ARCserve9 Backup program can be installed on the TANDBERG NAS and launched from a browser. You can use this software to manage either an autoloader

More information

DS License Server V6R2013x

DS License Server V6R2013x DS License Server V6R2013x DS License Server V6R2013x Installation and Configuration Guide Contains JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 7 Contains IBM(R) 64-bit SDK for AIX(TM), Java(TM) Technology

More information

capacity management for StorageWorks NAS servers

capacity management for StorageWorks NAS servers application notes hp OpenView capacity management for StorageWorks NAS servers First Edition (February 2004) Part Number: AA-RV1BA-TE This document describes how to use HP OpenView Storage Area Manager

More information

Avaya Network Configuration Manager User Guide

Avaya Network Configuration Manager User Guide Avaya Network Configuration Manager User Guide May 2004 Avaya Network Configuration Manager User Guide Copyright Avaya Inc. 2004 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED The products, specifications, and other technical information

More information

NetWrix Server Configuration Monitor

NetWrix Server Configuration Monitor NetWrix Server Configuration Monitor Version 2.2 Quick Start Guide Contents NetWrix Server Configuration Monitor Quick Start Guide 1. INTRODUCTION... 3 1.1 KEY FEATURES... 3 1.2 LICENSING... 4 1.3 HOW

More information

User Guidance. CimTrak Integrity & Compliance Suite 2.0.6.19

User Guidance. CimTrak Integrity & Compliance Suite 2.0.6.19 CimTrak Integrity & Compliance Suite 2.0.6.19 Master Repository Management Console File System Agent Network Device Agent Command Line Utility Ping Utility Proxy Utility FTP Repository Interface User Guidance

More information

HP Factory-Installed Operating System Software for Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 User Guide

HP Factory-Installed Operating System Software for Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 User Guide HP Factory-Installed Operating System Software for Microsoft Windows Small Business Server 2003 R2 User Guide Part Number 371502-004 October 2007 (Fourth Edition) Copyright 2004, 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development

More information

TABLE OF CONTENTS. Administration Guide - SAP for Oracle idataagent. Page 1 of 193 OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR ORACLE IDATAAGENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS. Administration Guide - SAP for Oracle idataagent. Page 1 of 193 OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR ORACLE IDATAAGENT Page 1 of 193 Administration Guide - SAP for Oracle idataagent TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW Introduction Key Features Full Range of Backup and Recovery Options SnapProtect Backup Command Line Support Backup

More information

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows

CA ARCserve Backup for Windows CA ARCserve Backup for Windows Agent for Sybase Guide r16.5 This Documentation, which includes embedded help systems and electronically distributed materials, (hereinafter referred to as the Documentation

More information

Novell ZENworks Asset Management 7.5

Novell ZENworks Asset Management 7.5 Novell ZENworks Asset Management 7.5 w w w. n o v e l l. c o m October 2006 INSTALLATION GUIDE Table Of Contents 1. Installation Overview... 1 If you are upgrading... 1 Installation Choices... 1 ZENworks

More information

Introduction 1-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting the First Time 2-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting: Upgrading from a Prior Version 3-1

Introduction 1-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting the First Time 2-1 Installing FAS 500 Asset Accounting: Upgrading from a Prior Version 3-1 Contents 1. Introduction 1-1 Supported Operating Environments................ 1-1 System Requirements............................. 1-2 Security Requirements........................ 1-3 Installing Server

More information

Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows (WAN Edition)

Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows (WAN Edition) C ase Manag e m e n t by C l i e n t P rofiles Server & Workstation Installation of Client Profiles for Windows (WAN Edition) T E C H N O L O G Y F O R T H E B U S I N E S S O F L A W Important Note on

More information

GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual

GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual GUARD1 PLUS SE Administrator's Manual Version 4.4 30700 Bainbridge Road Solon, Ohio 44139 Phone 216-595-0890 Fax 216-595-0991 [email protected] www.guard1.com i 2010 TimeKeeping Systems, Inc. GUARD1 PLUS

More information

External Data Connector (EMC Networker)

External Data Connector (EMC Networker) Page 1 of 26 External Data Connector (EMC Networker) TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS INSTALLATION (WINDOWS) INSTALLATION (UNIX) GETTING STARTED Perform a Discovery Perform a Migration ADVANCED

More information

Version 4.61 or Later. Copyright 2013 Interactive Financial Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. ProviderPro Network Administration Guide.

Version 4.61 or Later. Copyright 2013 Interactive Financial Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. ProviderPro Network Administration Guide. Version 4.61 or Later Copyright 2013 Interactive Financial Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. ProviderPro Network Administration Guide. This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished

More information

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution

EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution EMC NetWorker Module for Microsoft for Windows Bare Metal Recovery Solution Version 8.2 Service Pack 1 User Guide 302-001-235 REV 01 Copyright 2007-2015 EMC Corporation. All rights reserved. Published

More information

Virtual CD v10. Network Management Server Manual. H+H Software GmbH

Virtual CD v10. Network Management Server Manual. H+H Software GmbH Virtual CD v10 Network Management Server Manual H+H Software GmbH Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction 1 Legal Notices... 2 What Virtual CD NMS can do for you... 3 New Features in Virtual

More information

5-Bay Raid Sub-System Smart Removable 3.5" SATA Multiple Bay Data Storage Device User's Manual

5-Bay Raid Sub-System Smart Removable 3.5 SATA Multiple Bay Data Storage Device User's Manual 5-Bay Raid Sub-System Smart Removable 3.5" SATA Multiple Bay Data Storage Device User's Manual www.vipower.com Table of Contents 1. How the SteelVine (VPMP-75511R/VPMA-75511R) Operates... 1 1-1 SteelVine

More information

IBM Security QRadar Vulnerability Manager Version 7.2.1. User Guide

IBM Security QRadar Vulnerability Manager Version 7.2.1. User Guide IBM Security QRadar Vulnerability Manager Version 7.2.1 User Guide Note Before using this information and the product that it supports, read the information in Notices on page 61. Copyright IBM Corporation

More information

Microsoft File and Print Service Failover Using Microsoft Cluster Server

Microsoft File and Print Service Failover Using Microsoft Cluster Server Microsoft File and Print Service Failover Using Microsoft Cluster Server TechNote First Edition (March 1998) Part Number 309826-001 Compaq Computer Corporation Notice The information in this publication

More information

Installation Guide. SyBooks 3.4. [ Windows, Linux ]

Installation Guide. SyBooks 3.4. [ Windows, Linux ] Installation Guide SyBooks 3.4 [ Windows, Linux ] DOCUMENT ID: DC00123-01-0340-01 LAST REVISED: October 2008 Copyright 2008 by Sybase, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication pertains to Sybase software

More information

EXPRESSCLUSTER X for Windows Quick Start Guide for Microsoft SQL Server 2014. Version 1

EXPRESSCLUSTER X for Windows Quick Start Guide for Microsoft SQL Server 2014. Version 1 EXPRESSCLUSTER X for Windows Quick Start Guide for Microsoft SQL Server 2014 Version 1 NEC EXPRESSCLUSTER X 3.x for Windows SQL Server 2014 Quick Start Guide Document Number ECX-MSSQL2014-QSG, Version

More information

Scheduler Job Scheduling Console

Scheduler Job Scheduling Console Tivoli IBM Tivoli Workload Scheduler Job Scheduling Console Feature Level 1.3 (Revised December 2004) User s Guide SC32-1257-02 Tivoli IBM Tivoli Workload Scheduler Job Scheduling Console Feature Level

More information

Dell Statistica 13.0. Statistica Enterprise Installation Instructions

Dell Statistica 13.0. Statistica Enterprise Installation Instructions Dell Statistica 13.0 2015 Dell Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide is furnished under a software license or

More information

Managing Multi-Hypervisor Environments with vcenter Server

Managing Multi-Hypervisor Environments with vcenter Server Managing Multi-Hypervisor Environments with vcenter Server vcenter Server 5.1 vcenter Multi-Hypervisor Manager 1.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent

More information

Symantec NetBackup Getting Started Guide. Release 7.1

Symantec NetBackup Getting Started Guide. Release 7.1 Symantec NetBackup Getting Started Guide Release 7.1 21159722 Contents NetBackup Getting Started Guide... 5 About NetBackup... 5 How a NetBackup system works... 6 How to make a NetBackup system work for

More information

Dell NetVault Backup Plug-in for SharePoint 1.3. User s Guide

Dell NetVault Backup Plug-in for SharePoint 1.3. User s Guide Dell NetVault Backup Plug-in for 1.3 2014 Dell Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide is furnished under a software

More information

TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR ORACLE IDATAAGENT GETTING STARTED - DEPLOYING ON WINDOWS

TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR ORACLE IDATAAGENT GETTING STARTED - DEPLOYING ON WINDOWS Page 1 of 44 Quick Start - SAP for Oracle idataagent TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW Introduction Key Features Full Range of Backup and Recovery Options SnapProtect Backup Command Line Support Backup and Recovery

More information

English ETERNUS CS800 S3. Backup Exec OST Guide

English ETERNUS CS800 S3. Backup Exec OST Guide English ETERNUS CS800 S3 Backup Exec OST Guide Edition April 2012 Comments Suggestions Corrections The User Documentation Department would like to know your opinion on this manual. Your feedback helps

More information

EMC AVAMAR BACKUP CLIENTS

EMC AVAMAR BACKUP CLIENTS EMC AVAMAR BACKUP CLIENTS 5.0 USER GUIDE P/N 300-008-819 REV A01 EMC CORPORATION CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS: HOPKINTON, MA 01748-9103 1-508-435-1000 WWW.EMC.COM Copyright and Trademark Notices This document

More information

Enterprise Reporting Server v3.5

Enterprise Reporting Server v3.5 Enterprise Reporting Server v3.5 Administrator s Guide January 2001 Edition 2001 WebTrends Corporation Disclaimer WebTrends Corporation makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents

More information

WhatsUp Gold v16.3 Installation and Configuration Guide

WhatsUp Gold v16.3 Installation and Configuration Guide WhatsUp Gold v16.3 Installation and Configuration Guide Contents Installing and Configuring WhatsUp Gold using WhatsUp Setup Installation Overview... 1 Overview... 1 Security considerations... 2 Standard

More information

Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery 10.5. User s Guide

Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery 10.5. User s Guide Dell NetVault Bare Metal Recovery 10.5 User s Guide Copyright 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws. Dell, the

More information

TABLE OF CONTENTS. Administration Guide - SAP for MAXDB idataagent. Page 1 of 89 OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR MAXDB IDATAAGENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS. Administration Guide - SAP for MAXDB idataagent. Page 1 of 89 OVERVIEW SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS - SAP FOR MAXDB IDATAAGENT Page 1 of 89 Administration Guide - SAP for MAXDB idataagent TABLE OF CONTENTS OVERVIEW Introduction Key Features Full Range of Backup and Recovery Options SnapProtect Backup Command Line Support Backup

More information

Crystal Reports Installation Guide

Crystal Reports Installation Guide Crystal Reports Installation Guide Version XI Infor Global Solutions, Inc. Copyright 2006 Infor IP Holdings C.V. and/or its affiliates or licensors. All rights reserved. The Infor word and design marks

More information

InventoryControl for use with QuoteWerks Quick Start Guide

InventoryControl for use with QuoteWerks Quick Start Guide InventoryControl for use with QuoteWerks Quick Start Guide Copyright 2013 Wasp Barcode Technologies 1400 10 th St. Plano, TX 75074 All Rights Reserved STATEMENTS IN THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING THIRD PARTY

More information

Backup Exec 15. Quick Installation Guide

Backup Exec 15. Quick Installation Guide Backup Exec 15 Quick Installation Guide 21344987 Documentation version: 15 PN: 21344987 Legal Notice Copyright 2015 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, the Symantec Logo, the Checkmark

More information

readme_asm.txt -------------------------------------------------------------------- README.TXT

readme_asm.txt -------------------------------------------------------------------- README.TXT README.TXT Adaptec Storage Manager as of March 27, 2006 Please review this file for important information about issues and erratas that were discovered after completion of the standard product documentation.

More information

STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER

STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER Notes: STATISTICA VERSION 9 STATISTICA ENTERPRISE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE WITH TERMINAL SERVER 1. These instructions focus on installation on Windows Terminal Server (WTS), but are applicable

More information

Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991-2009 LEAD Technologies, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS 1991-2009 LEAD Technologies, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Installation Guide Lenel OnGuard 2009 Installation Guide, product version 6.3. This guide is item number DOC-110, revision 1.038, May 2009 Copyright 1992-2009 Lenel Systems International, Inc. Information

More information

Online Backup Client User Manual

Online Backup Client User Manual For Mac OS X Software version 4.1.7 Version 2.2 Disclaimer This document is compiled with the greatest possible care. However, errors might have been introduced caused by human mistakes or by other means.

More information

BrightStor ARCserve Backup for Linux

BrightStor ARCserve Backup for Linux BrightStor ARCserve Backup for Linux Agent for MySQL Guide r11.5 D01213-2E This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the "Documentation") is for the end user's

More information

DS License Server. Installation and Configuration Guide. 3DEXPERIENCE R2014x

DS License Server. Installation and Configuration Guide. 3DEXPERIENCE R2014x DS License Server Installation and Configuration Guide 3DEXPERIENCE R2014x Contains JAVA SE RUNTIME ENVIRONMENT (JRE) VERSION 7 Contains IBM(R) 64-bit SDK for AIX(TM), Java(TM) Technology Edition, Version

More information

How To Backup An Org Database On An Org Server On A Pc Oracle Server On Anorora (Orora) With A Backup And Restore Option On A Windows 7.5.2 (Ororora).Org (Orroboron

How To Backup An Org Database On An Org Server On A Pc Oracle Server On Anorora (Orora) With A Backup And Restore Option On A Windows 7.5.2 (Ororora).Org (Orroboron CA ARCserve Backup for Windows Enterprise Option for SAP R/3 for Oracle Guide r16 This Documentation, which includes embedded help systems and electronically distributed materials, (hereinafter referred

More information

IBM FileNet Image Services

IBM FileNet Image Services IBM FileNet Image Services Version 4.1 Microsoft Cluster Server Installation and Upgrade Procedures for Windows Server GC31-5531-01 IBM FileNet Image Services Version 4.1 Microsoft Cluster Server Installation

More information

NTP Software File Auditor for NAS, EMC Edition

NTP Software File Auditor for NAS, EMC Edition NTP Software File Auditor for NAS, EMC Edition Installation Guide June 2012 This guide provides a short introduction to the installation and initial configuration of NTP Software File Auditor for NAS,

More information

Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide

Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide Nortel Networks Call Center Reporting Set Up and Operation Guide www.nortelnetworks.com 2001 Nortel Networks P0919439 Issue 07 (24) Table of contents How to use this guide... 5 Introduction...5 How this

More information

Go to CGTech Help Library. Installing CGTech Products

Go to CGTech Help Library. Installing CGTech Products Go to CGTech Help Library Installing CGTech Products VERICUT Installation Introduction to Installing VERICUT Installing and configuring VERICUT is simple, typically requiring only a few minutes for most

More information